Skip to main content

Full text of "The Tomb Of Tut Ankh Amen Vjol I"

See other formats




THE TOMB OF 
TUT-ANKHAMEN 

DISCOVERED BY THE LATE EARL OF 
CARNARVON AND HOWARD CARTER 


By 

HOWARD CARTER 

AND 

A. C. MACE 

(Associate Curator , Metropolitan Museum of Art , New York) 


Volume I 

With 104 Illustrations from Photographs by 

HARRY BURTON 

(Of the Metropolitan Museum of Art , New York) 


CASSELL AND COMPANY, LTD 
London, Toronto, Melbourne and Sydney 



First published November 1923 
Second Impression October 1926 


Printed in Great Britain 



THE TOMB OF TUT ANKH AMEN 



THE LATE EARL OF CARNARVON. 


From a Photograph fcp F. ]. Mortimer , F.R.P.S. 



EJeMcation 

With the full sympathy of my collaborator , 
Mr. Mace , I dedicate this account of the discovery 
of the tomb of Tut •ankh* Amen to the memory of 
my beloved friend and colleague 

LORD CARNARVON 

who died in the hour of his triumph. 

But for his untiring generosity and constant 
encouragement our labours could never have been 
crowned with success. His judgment in ancient 
art has rarely been equalled. His efforts , which 
have done so much to extend our knowledge of 
Egyptology , will ever be honoured in history , and 
by me his memory will always be cherished . 




PREFACE 


T nS narrative of the discovery of the tomb of 
Tut- ankh- Amen is merely preliminary : a final 
record of purely scientific nature will take 
some time, nor can it be adequately made until 
the work of investigation of the tomb and its vast 
material has been completed. Nevertheless, in view 
of the public interest in our discovery, we felt that 
some account without loss of time, no matter how 
summary, was necessary, and that is the reason for 
the publication of this book. 

We have here for the first time, a royal burial 
very little disturbed in spite of the hurried plun- 
dering it has suffered at the hands of the ancient 
tomb-robbers, and within the shrines of the tomb- 
chamber I believe the Pharaoh lies intact, in all 
his royal magnificence. 

It has been suggested by certain Egyptologists 
that we should write up in the summer, and publish 
at once, all we have done in the winter. But there 
is, outside the stress of work and other duties, a 
strong reason against this. Our work will take several 
seasons of concentrated labour on our discovery — the 
tomb, of the contents of which we are making as 
faithful a record as possible. If, following the advice 
of our critics, we were to write up our progress in 
detail before our work could be collated in its entirety, 
mistakes would necessarily creep in which, when once 
made, would be hard to rectify. We therefore ven- 

vii 



Preface 


ture to hope that the method we have adopted is 
more in the interest of scientific accuracy, and less 
likely to give rise to erroneous impressions. Nor are 
warnings wanting against undue haste. For instance, 
we bear in mind the vault containing the cache of 
Akh*en-Aten found in this Valley. The account of this 
important and interesting discovery was hurriedly 
published and announced as the tomb of Queen Tyi, 
whereas, after more careful investigation, only one 
object in that magnificent find, the so-called canopy, 
which apparently had had an extraordinary influence 
on the minds of its discoverers and recorders, could 
be claimed as possibly belonging to that queen. Such 
mistakes as these we wish to avoid. Moreover, as we 
have as yet seen only one quarter of the contents of 
this tomb, in this preliminary account we venture to 
claim the indulgence of the reader. He will under- 
stand that it must be subject to possible future cor- 
rection in accordance with the nature of facts revealed 
by the further progress of our work. 

When, by the dim light of a candle, we made the 
first cursory examination of the Antechamber, we 
thought that one of the caskets (No. 101) contained 
rolls of papyri. But, later, under the rays of a power- 
ful electric light, these proved to be rolls of linen, 
which had even then some resemblance to rolls of 
papyri. This was naturally disappointing, and gave 
rise to the suggestion that the historical harvest, 
compared with the artistic value of our discovery, 
will be unimportant because of the lack of literary 
evidence concerning King Tut-ankh-Amen and the 
political confusion of his time. 

It has also been argued that these chambers do 
not represent the actual tomb of the king but that 

viii 




Preface 


Hor-em-heb, Tut-ankh-Amen’s second successor, had 
probably usurped his real tomb and hurriedly placed 
his furniture in the chambers of this vault. Nor is 
this all. It has also been said that it was merely a 
cache, and further it has even more improbably been 
conjectured that the objects found therein were a col- 
lection of palace furniture, belonging to the dynasty, 
and hidden there as Tut- ankh- Amen was the last of 
that royal line, and that of these many were of 
Mesopotamian origin. I may perhaps be pardoned 
for here observing that these criticisms have been 
advanced by authors who have never seen the tomb, 
let alone its contents. 

Now in reply to these objections I would here say 
that so far as we have gone we have found nothing 
that should not belong to the funerary equipment 
of the king. All the objects are in perfect keeping 
with the evidence and knowledge gleaned from the 
fragmentary material of the royal tombs of the New 
Empire discovered in this Valley, and they are in 
every way pure late Eighteenth Dynasty Egyptian. 

That this discovery is the real tomb of Tut* 
ankh- Amen, there can, I think, be no doubt, but 
it must be remembered that, like the tomb of Ay, 
his immediate successor, it is of semi-royal and semi- 
private type. In fact it is rather the sepulchre 
of a possible heir to the throne than that of a 
king. 

A comparison of the tomb plan with that of the 
tombs of the kings’ mothers, the kings’ wives, and 
the kings’ children, in The Valley of the Queens, and 
with the tombs of his predecessors and successors in 
The Valley of the Kings will, I think, show this. 

From its style of work and certain idiosyncrasies 




Preface 


observable, it is not improbable that it was made 
by the same hand as the vault that contained the 
transported burial of Akh*en*Aten which is in its near 
vicinity. The plan of that vault closely resembles 
the tomb of Tut* ankh* Amen, and both are alike 
variants of the plan and principles of the tombs of 
the Theban monarchs of the Empire. The apparent 
curtailment of design in the Akh*en*Aten vault — it 
having alone the one completed chamber — was prob- 
ably due to its being made for a cache to receive 
nothing but the revered mummy with a few 
essentials belonging to its burial. It may be for that 
reason that we find only the first chamber — the 
Antechamber — prepared and plastered to receive 
those remains. It should also be noticed that in the 
right hand wall of this one chamber the ancient 
Egyptian mason commenced a second room, which 
now, in its incomplete state, suggests a niche ; but on 
comparing it with the grave of Tut* ankh* Amen the 
idea and the intention become obvious — it was to be 
a sepulchral hall. In other words, in the design 
there is a certain affinity with the tomb of Akh* 
en*Aten at El Amarna, and the vault devised for a 
cache in this Valley for that so-called heretic king, 
and also with the tombs of Tut* ankh* Amen and Ay, 
which is peculiar to that El Amarna branch of the 
Dynasty. With them we also find the finest art of 
the Imperial Age in Egypt, and also the germ of its 
decadence which made itself manifest in the succeed- 
ing Nineteenth Dynasty. 

It was King Ay, Tut-ankh-Amen’s successor, who 
buried our monarch, for there, on the inner walls of 
Tut*ankh*Amen’s tomb-chamber, Ay, as king has 
caused himself to be represented among the religious 




Preface 


scenes, officiating before Tut-ankh-Amen — a scene 
unprecedented in the royal tombs of this necropolis. 

It were, perhaps, well at this point to say some- 
thing concerning the mentality of the ancient Egypt- 
ians as manifested in their art, which is closely 
associated with their religion. If we study the ancient 
Egyptian religious ideas we may be absorbed by the 
curious medley of their mythology, yet in the end we 
shall feel that we have progressed beyond them. But 
if once we have acquired the power of admiring and 
understanding their art, we do not, for the most part, 
entertain this assurance of aesthetic progress and 
superiority. Perhaps we may do so in minor details, 
but no sensible person will ever imagine that he has 
got beyond the essentials their art embodies. We 
cannot with all our progress get beyond those 
essentials. Egyptian art expresses its aim in a 
stately and simple convention, and is thus dignified 
by its own sedateness, and was never wanting in 
reverence. 

No doubt lack of perspective in their art implies 
limitation, therefore not a little must be surrendered 
to this limitation, but within its convention the best 
Egyptian art embodies refinement, embodies love of 
simplicity, patience in execution, and never descends 
to an unideal copy of nature. Simplicity is the sign 
of greatness in art, and the Egyptians never strove 
to be original or to be sensational. Within the 
trammels of his convention the ancient Egyptian 
looked at nature through his own eyes and thus 
character was imparted alone by his subjective per- 
sonality, whether from a religious or aesthetic point 
of view. It is for this reason that Egyptian por- 
traiture to the untrained eye often appears to have 




Preface 


a certain sameness and even monotony. This, how- 
ever, is really due to the convention of the epoch, 
whereby individual traits were softened in accordance 
with the ideals of the Egyptian convention. These 
facts are manifested by the material in the tomb of 
Tut* ankh* Amen. We are astounded by the immense 
productivity of the art of its period which it contains, 
but in studying it, a somewhat unexpected aspect of 
the character and domestic tastes of the king is sug- 
gested. Tut*ankh*Amen’s tastes seem to have been 
rather those of a nobleman than those associated 
with the religious and official art dominant in this 
royal Theban cemetery. In the art of his tomb it 
is the domestic affection and solar tendency that are 
the dominant ideas, rather than the austere religious 
convention that characterizes all the other royal 
tombs in this Valley. 

Among the immense quantities of material 
in Tut-ankh-Amen’s tomb, as also exhibited in 
the beautiful reliefs of his reign in the great colon- 
nade of the Temple of Luxor, we find extreme 
delicacy of style together with character of the ut- 
most refinement. In the case of a painted scene, 
vase, or statue, the primary idea of art is obvious, 
but in utilitarian objects such as a walking-stick, 
staff or wine-strainer, art, as we know too well 
to-day, is not a necessity. Here in this tomb the 
artistic value seems to have been always the first 
consideration. 

This is scarcely the place to discuss the question 
of ancient Egyptian art, as the book deals mainly 
with the actual finding of the tomb. But The Valley 
cannot be overlooked, and it will be helpful to include 
some general statements upon its impressive history, 

xii 




Preface 


as well as to record certain unexpected events to 
which the discovery gave rise. 

After so many years of barren labour a sudden 
development of great magnitude finds one unpre- 
pared. One is, for instance, confronted by the 
question of adequate and competent assistance. In 
this case the help needed obviously included the all 
important recording, photographing, planning, and 
the preservation of the objects — the latter demanding 
chemical knowledge. But the first and most pressing 
need was that of photography and drawing. Nothing 
could be contemplated until a full pictorial record 
of the contents of the Antechamber had been made. 
This must not only include photographs of the 
general disposition of the objects therein, and the 
order of their sequence, but must afterwards be 
followed by diagrammatic drawings showing relative 
positions as seen from above — a task involving not 
only photographic skill of a high order but also 
that of an experienced surveyor. Then came the 
consideration of their preservation, their removal, 
and their description — the work of a chemist, of a 
man experienced in the handling of antiquities, and 
finally of an archaeologist. 

This problem was quickly solved through the 
generosity of our colleagues of the American Expedi- 
tion of the Metropolitan Museum of Art of New 
York. In answer to my appeal my most esteemed 
friend and colleague, Mr. A. M. Lythgoe, the Curator 
of the Egyptian Department of that museum, whose 
kind offer was subsequently most generously con- 
firmed by his trustees and director, cabled and placed 
at my disposal, to the detriment of their own work, 
such members of their staff as might be required. 

xiii 


Preface 


For such luck as this I had not dared to hope. 
It included the services of Mr. A. C. Mace, one of 
their associate curators, of Mr. Harry Burton, their 
expert photographic recorder, to whom the photo- 
graphs in this volume are due, and of Messrs. Hall 
and Hauser, draftsmen to their expedition — a group 
of very able field-men and all of wide archaeological 
knowledge. And let me here place on record the 
sacrifice that Mr. Mace, the director of their excava- 
tions on the pyramid field at Lisht, made in our 
interests, which meant the abandonment of his many 
years of research work at Lisht, and I should add 
that the preparation of this book has fallen largely 
on his shoulders. At the same time I must express 
our most sincere and grateful thanks to the trustees 
of the Metropolitan Museum of Art of New York, to 
their director, Mr. Edward Robinson, to Mr. Lythgoe, 
and also to Mr. H. E. Winlock, whose expedition 
for them at Thebes was thus considerably denuded. 

While in Cairo another stroke of good luck 
occurred. Mr. Lucas, Director of the Chemical 
Department of the Egyptian Government, for the 
moment free of his official duties, offered us the 
valuable aid of his chemical knowledge. 

Previous to this, when I realized the probable 
magnitude of the discovery, Mr. A. R. Callender at 
Erment, who had often assisted me on former occasions, 
at once came to my aid. Dr. Alan Gardiner also 
very kindly placed his unrivalled philological know- 
ledge at our disposal. Moreover, Professor James H. 
Breasted, of the University of Chicago, the eminent 
historian of ancient Egypt, then in Egypt, gave me 
his valued advice and enlightened me upon the 
historical data and evidence of the seal-impressions 




Sti,^ 

(sO IAJ~\As fct C^V0 $d£jL\) <£~4 ^aa*j L& ~+4 , 

^ qJLl* 4 * y *j*^* '*J cto A CLc 

(% &CCjt Aj 1 ^ pu- (4 He IA%, £ Cl^cXy 

(J$jL*jfo (^Y^yy^. yt**A, &CMM4L++y CLmJ jV-'/S 

(ijaM^Cf 1 / lo CUk^&t , ^ 

Sti*u. Co oJU^L( «-<4<wLv V J4****** «A* «k£l 

1 4 l^, oJl UTodz. (<o C+JOvut-J. 

Orv* <K£C**\JU*+j tt TJ ^ £fys^u/i^J4t i^tluolt^r^ . 

A/u> <4C44*Mby ^ o-~L J+***n+ <J £x + 9 *-. ^3^cy 

&hCt£ci£ ftw <f flu^ 7 Z^-fc ^y^Jsyo 

‘^■^>C « i Q*+J fcf Aty^Jj CC*a\> £ *«J & . 

/ Jy^j AA^UAyU# tj) ^>mjV JXj^L. udb+ldU, J 

fi V |/ OlXQ- /Yr>*vJlu\o Ojf ($L*> <£o*-»lo 'Y**wtyCy f ’•? &t 
aM* 0 *VI>V (A\J 

c ^ 'J^aas t+jJL ^nvuc« 

7 k*A 0 *U Au*d £*Av**i 

' ^ ate ^m<i fy**fJ** J 



Preface 


on the four sealed doorways found in various condi- 
tions in the tomb. 

Throughout the whole of this undertaking we 
received the utmost courtesy and kindness from all 
the officials connected with the Department of Antiqu- 
ities of the Egyptian Government, and I herewith 
desire to express the acknowledgment due to Monsieur 
Lacau, Directeur General au Service des Antiquit£s. 
And here I may mention how much I am indebted 
to the members of The Times staff for all their ready 
co-operation in all matters, even those outside the 
sphere of their own interests. 

My appreciative thanks are also due to Lady 
Burghclere, Lord Carnarvon’s devoted sister, for the 
biographical introduction which she has so kindly 
contributed, for no one could have been better fitted 
to carry out this task. 

I must also thank my dear friend Mr. Percy 
White, the novelist, Professor of English Literature 
in the Egyptian University, for his ungrudging 
literary help. 

Lastly I should like to express my recognition 
of the services of my Egyptian staff of workmen 
who have loyally and conscientiously carried out 
every duty which I entrusted to them. The 
letter, on p. xv, which, in its quaint English, 
shows their zeal during my absence, should per- 
haps go on record. 

Howard Carter. 


August , 1923. 




CONTENTS 


FAOE 

Introduction. Biographical Sketch of the late 

Lord Carnarvon. By Lady Burghclere . 1 

CHAFTER 

1. The King and the Queen .... 41 

2. The Valley and the Tomb .... 50 

3. The Valley in Modern Times ... 63 

4. Our Prefatory Work at Thebes ... 75 

5. The Finding of the Tomb .... 86 

6. A Preliminary Investigation .... 97 

7. A Survey of the Antechamber . . . 110 

8. Clearing the Antechamber . . . .123 

9. Visitors and the Press 141 

10. Work in the Laboratory .... 151 

11. The Opening of the Sealed Door . . 178 

Appendix 189 

Index 225 


B 




LIST OF PLATES 


The Late Earl of Carnarvon .... Frontispiece 


PLATE FACING PAGE 

I Statue of King Tut-ankh-Amen .... 42 

II Back Panel of the Throne 46 

III Road to the Tombs of the Kings ... 50 

IV View of the Royal Cemetery .... 58 

V Entrance to the Tomb of Rameses VI . . .64 

VI Interior of the Tomb of Rameses IX . . .68 

VII Interior of the Tomb of Rameses IV : showing the 

Sarcophagus 72 

VIII View showing position of Hat-shep-SQt's Cleft-Tomb 80 

IX Removing surface debris in search of the Tomb of 

Tut-ankh-Amen 82 

X Example of the Workmen’s Huts found above the 

Tomb 84 

XI View of the Relative positions of the Tombs of 

Tut-ankh-Amen and Rameses VI . .86 

XII Entrance to the Tomb as first seen ... 88 

XIII The Sixteen Steps 90 

XIV Examples of Seal Impressions .... 94 

XV View of the Antechamber, as seen from the Passage 

through the Steel Grille 96 

XVI Interior of Antechamber : Northern End . . 98 

XVII Interior of Antechamber : The Lion-headed Couch . 102 

XVIII Interior of Antechamber: The Hathor Couch . 104 


xix 



List of Plates 


PLATE FACING 

XIX Interior of Antechamber : Southern End showing 
the Thoueris Couch and the Chariots . 

XX Interior of Antechamber : The Entrance with Steel 
Gate 

XXI Painted Casket (No. 21) in situ 
XXII Cluster of Alabaster Vases .... 

XXIII (A) The King's Sceptre of Gold and Lapis Lazuli 

Blue Glass ...... 

(B) Two Sistra of Wood, Gilt and Bronze 

XXIV Throne and Footstool beneath the Thoueris 

Couch 

XXV The King's Mannequin 

XXVI View of the Chariots, illustrating Process of 
Clearing 

XXVII Funerary Bouquet 

XXVIII Thoueris Couch 

XXIX Pedestal of Missing Statuette in the Small Golden 
Shrine 

XXX Plunderers' Loot (Eight gold rings tied in a Scarf) 

XXXI Visitors above the Tomb 

XXXII Thoueris Couch being taken out of Tomb. 

XXXIII Convoy of Antiquities to the Laboratory . 

XXXIV Painted Casket No. 21 : Showing the unpacking. 

First and second stages 

XXXV Painted Casket No. 21 : Third and fourth stages 
XXXVI The King's Court Sandal and Slipper 

(A) The Buckle of Sandal in elaborate Gold 

Work 

(B) The Sandal 

(C) The Slipper of Leather .... 


PAGE 

106 

108 

110 

114 

116 

116 

118 

120 

124 

126 

132 

136 

138 

142 

144 

148 

164 

166 

168 

168 

168 

168 


xx 




List of Plates 


PLATE FACING 

XXXVII Box No. 54. View of Interior 

XXXVIII Reconstruction of Corslet .... 

XXXIX (A) Collar Resting on Lid of Box No. 54. (B) 
Reconstruction of the Collar 

XL Necklace restrung in original Order . 

XLI Sentinel Figures guarding the Sealed Doorway to 
the Sepulchral Chamber . 

XLII Sealed Doorway to the Sepulchral Chamber show- 
ing the Re-closing of the Plunderers' Hole . 

XL I II The Opening of the Sealed Doorway to Sepulchral 
Chamber. Carnarvon and Carter . 

XLIV The Opening of the Sealed Doorway to Sepulchral 
Chamber. Carter and Mace 

XLV The Shrine within the Sepulchre. 

XL VI The King's Wishing Cup in Alabaster (Calcite) of 
Lotiform ....... 

XLVII Alabaster (Calcite) Perfume Vase Resting upon an 
Ornamental Stand 

XLVIII Alabaster (Calcite) Perfume Vase Resting upon a 
Trellis-work Pedestal 

XLIX (A) One of the King's Beds carved in solid Ebony 
with String Mesh 

(B) The Open-work Foot Panel of Ebony, Ivory, 
and Gold ....... 

L Scene in Miniature Painting upon the right-hand 
side of the Lid of the Painted Casket (No. 21) 

LI Scene in Miniature Painting upon the left-hand 
side of the Lid of the Painted Caskets 
(No. 21) 

LII Scene in Miniature Painting upon the left side Panel 
of the Painted Casket. (No. 21) . 
xxi 


PAGE 

170 

172 

174 

176 

178 

180 

182 

184 

186 

190 

191 

192 

193 

193 

194 

195 

196 




List of Plates 


PLATE PACINO 

LIII Scene in Miniature Painting upon the right panel of 
the Painted Gasket. (No. 21) 

LIV Scenes upon the Front (A) and Back (B) Panels of the 
Painted Casket. (No. 21) 

LV Large Cedar-wood Casket Inlaid and Veneered with 
Ebony and Ivory. (No. 32) ... 

LVI (A) An Alabaster (Calcite) Casket (No. 40) . 

(B) Decorated Gilt Casket 

LVII (A) A Solid Ivory Jewel Box (No. 54 ddd) . 

(B) Back of the Box ...... 

LVIII A Large Vaulted-Top Box (No. 101) . 

LIX A Child’s Chair (No. 39) 

LX A Carved Cedar-wood Chair (No. 87) . 

LXI The Open-work Panel of the back of the Carved 
Cedar-wood Chair 

LXII The King’s Golden Throne (No. 91) 

LXIII The King’s Golden Throne (No. 91) . 

LXFV The King’s Golden Throne (No. 91) 

LXV (A) A Large Pendant Scarab of Gold and Lapis 
Lazuli Blue Glass 

(B) Bezel of Scarab 

(C) A Gold Pendant ...... 

(D) The Chased Back of the Pendant . 

LXVI (A) The Central Pectoral of the Corslet 

(B) The Back Pendant of the Corslet of Gold Richly 
Inlaid 

LXVII (A) Seven Finger-rings and an Ornamental Finger- 
ring Bezel 

(B) Gold Buckles of Open-work Sheet Gold, with 
Applied Pattern in Tiny Granules . 


PACE 

197 

198 

199 

200 
200 
201 
201 
202 

203 

204 

205 

206 

207 

208 

209 

209 

209 

209 

210 

210 

211 

211 


xxu 




List of Plates 


FLATS PACINO 

LXVIII The Small Golden Shrine .... 

LXIX Two Ceremonial Walking-Sticks covered with 
thin Gold Foil 

LXX A Ceremonial Walking-Stick .... 

LXXI A Staff and Stick 

LXXII Sticks and Whips with Ornamental Handles in Gold 
Work ....... 

LXXI II Two Stools 

LXX IV Two Stools 

LXXV Torch and Torch-holders of Bronze and Gold upon 
Wooden Pedestals 

LXXVI Three of the King’s Bows .... 
LXXVII Three of the King’s Bows .... 
LXXVIII Textiles of Applied Needlework 
LXXIX Examples of the King’s Gloves 


Sketch-Plan of the Tomb 


MSI 

212 

213 

214 

215 

216 

217 

218 

219 

220 
221 
222 
222 

223 


xxiii 





INTRODUCTION 


BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH OF THE LATE 
LORD CARNARVON 

By Lady Burghclere 

I F it is true that the whole world loves a lover, 
it is also true that either openly or secretly the 
world loves Romance. Hence, doubtless, the 
passionate and farflung interest aroused by the dis- 
covery of Tut-ankh-Amen’s tomb, an interest ex- 
tended to the discoverer, and certainly not lessened 
by the swift tragedy that waited on his brief hour of 
triumph. A story that opens like Aladdin’s Cave, 
and ends like a Greek myth of Nemesis cannot fail 
to capture the imagination of all men and women 
who, in this workaday existence, can still be moved 
by tales of high endeavour and unrelenting doom. 
Let it be gratefully acknowledged by those to whom 
Carnarvon’s going must remain an ever-enduring 
sorrow, that the sympathy displayed equalled the 
excitement evoked by the revelations in The 
Valley of the Kings. It is in thankful response 
to that warm-hearted sympathy that this slight 
sketch of a many-sided personality, around whom 
such emotions have centred, finds place here as intro- 
duction to the history of that discovery to which 
the discoverer so eagerly devoted his energies and 
ultimately sacrificed his life. 



Introduction 


To those who knew Lord Carnarvon, there is a 
singular fitness in the fact that he should have been 
the hero of one of the most dramatic episodes of the 
present day, since under the quiet exterior of this 
reticent Englishman, beat, in truth, a romantic 
heart. The circumstances of his life had undoubtedly 
fostered the natural bent of his character. Born on 
June 26th, 1866, George Edward Stanhope Molyneux 
Herbert, Lord Porchester, enjoyed the inestimable 
privilege of being reared in an atmosphere coloured 
by romance and permeated by a fine simplicity. 
Nor was he less happy in his outward surroundings. 
Even when matched against the many “ stately 
homes of England,” Highclere must rank as a domain 
of rare beauty. Much of its charm is due to its 
contrasted scenery. From the close-cropped lawns, 
shaded by giant cedars of Lebanon, where in a past 
century Pope sat and discoursed with his friend, 
Robert Caroline Herbert, the godson and namesake 
of George IPs queen, the transition is brief to thickets 
of hawthorn, woods of beech and oak, and lakes, 
the happy haunts of wildfowl ; while all around stand 
the high downs either densely timbered or as bare 
and wild as when the Britons built their camp of 
refuge on Beacon Hill, the great chalk bastion that 
dominates the country-side. To children nurtured on 
Arthurian legends it needed little mental effort to 
translate the woodlands, where they galloped their 
ponies, into the Forest of Broceliande, or the old 
monkish fishponds, where they angled for pike and 
gathered water-lilies, into that magic mere which 
swallowed up the good blade Excalibur ; whilst a 
mound rising from a distant gravel-pit merely re- 
quired the drawbridge, erected by the obliging house 




Introduction 


carpenter across its surrounding trickle of water, to 
become Tintagel. 

If, as any Catholic priest would assure us, the 
indelible impressions on the human mind are those 
stamped in the earliest years, Porchester graduated 
in a school of Romance and Adventure. Moreover, 
hereditary influences combined with environment to 
give an individual outlook on life. The son of two 
high-minded parents who were ever striving to give 
practical effect to their ideals for the benefit of others, 
there was nothing to unlearn in the early education. 
Indeed, it can confidently be asserted that, throughout 
his childhood, the curly-headed little boy neither 
heard nor witnessed anything that “ common was 
or mean.” The village, the household, were members 
of the family. It was the feudal, the patriarchal 
system at its best, the dreams of “ Young England ” 
realized. For the law that governed the community 
at Highclere was the law of kindness, though kind- 
ness that permitted no compromise with moral laxity. 
An amusing commentary on the standards recog- 
nized as governing — or at any rate expected to govern 
— home life, was furnished on one occasion by the 
children’s nurse. One of her nurslings, thoroughly 
scared by the blood-curdling descriptions of Hell, 
and Hell-fire, contained in a horrible little religious 
primer, “ The Peep o’ Day ” (now mercifully dis- 
carded by later generations) administered to her by 
an injudicious governess, naturally turned to the 
beloved “ Nana ” for consolation. She did not seek 
in vain. “ Don’t worry, dearie, over such tales,” 
said the good old woman, “ no one from Highclere 
Castle will ever go to Hell ! ” 

By common consent, Porchester’s father, the 

3 



Introduction 


fourth Earl of Carnarvon, was regarded as a states- 
man who had never allowed ambition to deflect him 
by a hair’s breadth from the path mapped out by a 
meticulous conscience. But although he had re- 
signed from the Derby-Disraeli Government rather 
than support the Franchise Bill of 1867, he was the 
reverse of a reactionary. Both in imperial and social 
schemes he was far in advance of most of his con- 
temporaries on both sides in politics. Indeed, it is 
interesting to speculate how much of blood and 
treasure would have been spared to this country if 
the measures and judgment of this truly Conserva- 
tive statesman had commanded the support of the 
Cabinets and party with which he was connected. 
Little boys are not interested in politics — except in 
lighting bonfires to celebrate successful elections — 
but whatever are the eventual developments, en- 
vironment and heredity are the bedrock whence 
character is hewn. The fifth Earl of Carnarvon — 
the archaeologist — in his physical and mental “ make- 
up,” to use the modern phrase, did not recall his 
father. But it was from the latter that he inherited 
the quality of independent thought, coupled with an 
extreme pleasure in putting his mind alongside that 
of other men. Moreover, the power of scholarly 
concentration which he brought to bear on the many 
and varied subjects in which he was interested, was 
certainly part of the paternal heritage, for the fourth 
Earl was one of the finest classical scholars of his 
generation. Indeed, there are those still living who 
can bear witness to his faultless Latin oration as 
Viceroy at Trinity College, Dublin, and remember his 
admission, when pressed, that he could as easily 
have made the speech in Greek. 

4 




Introduction 


In 1875 a shadow fell across the boy’s life. His 
mother died after giving birth to a third daughter. 
The shadow was destined to be enduring, since 
Evelyn Stanhope, Lady Carnarvon, was one of 
those rare women who are in the world and yet 
not of it, and the want of her clever sympathy 
was a lifelong loss to Porchester. His whimsical 
wit and her keen sense of humour were made for 
mutual understanding. She would have helped him 
to overcome the ingrained reserve, which it needed 
the action of years to wear away, at the outset 
interpreting an unusual character to the world, and 
the world to her son. 

Even when the surviving parent is as devoted a 
father as was Lord Carnarvon, it is perhaps unavoid- 
able that the mother’s death should bring an element 
of austerity into children’s lives, though it also 
tends, as it certainly did in this instance, to tighten 
the links between brother and sisters. After their 
mother’s death, Porchester, or “ Porchy ” as he was 
then habitually called, and the little girls were, 
however, unspeakably blessed in the devoted affec- 
tion lavished upon them by their father’s sisters 
Lady Gwendolen Herbert and Eveline, Lady Ports- 
mouth. The former was a delicate invalid around 
whose sofa young and old clustered, secure of sym- 
pathy in sorrow or in joy. The fact that an unhappy 
chance had cheated her of her share of youth’s fun 
and gaiety made her the more intent on securing 
these for the motherless children, in whose lives she 
realized her own life. She was the natural inter- 
preter when vengeance threatened to follow on 
chemical experiments resulting in semi-asphyxiating 
and wholly malodorous vapours, or when excursions 

5 




Introduction 


amongst water-taps sent cataracts of water down the 
Vandycks. The schoolroom discipline of the ’seventies 
was not conceived on Montessori lines. The extreme 
mildness of Lady Gwendolen’s rule did not always 
commend itself to tutors and governesses. They 
recalled that a spear, which at his earnest entreaty 
she had bestowed on Porchy, was fleshed in a valuable 
engraving ; while another of her gifts, a large saw, 
was regarded as so dangerous that it became “ tabu ” 
and hung suspended by a broad blue ribbon, a curious 
ornament on the schoolroom wall. Nor can it be 
denied that to present a small boy with half-a-crown 
to console him for breaking a window is a homoeo- 
pathic method of education, which would excite 
protests from pastors and teachers of any age. But 
despite her unfailing indulgence, her influence was 
never enervating. It is what we are, not our sayings, 
and still less our scoldings, that count with those 
keen-eyed critics, the younger generation. Naughti- 
ness in Gwendolen’s neighbourhood was unthinkable. 
In her own person she so endeared the quality of 
gentleness — not a virtue always popular with the 
young qf the male sex — that Porchy’s sisters and 
small half brothers never suffered from roughness 
at his hands. A tease he was, a terrific tease then 
and to the end of life, in sober middle-age getting 
the same rapture from a “ rise ” out of his 
Mends or family as a fifth-form school boy. But 
the strand of gentleness that ran through his nature 
was not its least attaching quality, fostered in those 
early days by the one effectual method of education, 
the example of those we love. 

Long years afterwards when her nephew laid 
Lady Gwendolen to rest at Highclere, he reverted 

6 




Introduction 


with grateful tenderness to the memories, the lessons 
of that selfless love. “ What a blank,” he wrote, 
would the absence of “ that little figure in grey ” 
mean to him at the family gatherings, the christenings, 
the weddings, where her presence carried him back 
to all the lovely memories of childhood. 

Never robust, it is doubtful whether Lord Car- 
narvon would have accomplished even his brief span 
of life but for the part played in his boyhood by 
Lady Portsmouth and her home, Eggesford, which, 
became his second home. The England of the 
’seventies was still an age of hermetically closed 
windows, overheated rooms, comforters and — worst 
horror of all — respirators. Fortunately for the boy, 
Lady Portsmouth, a pioneer in many phases of work 
and thought, was a strenuous advocate of open air. 
The delicate, white-faced child, after a couple of 
months spent in hunting and out-of-door games with 
the tribe of cousins in North Devon, was transformed 
into a hardy young sportsman. At Eggesford horses 
and hounds were as much the foreground of life as 
politics and books at Highclere. “ Mr. Sponge’s 
Sporting Tour ” replaced “ Marmion,” though it was 
“ The Talisman ” and “ Ivanhoe ” that Lady Ports- 
mouth read aloud to the family in the cherished 
evening hour, the climax of the busy, happy day at 
Eggesford. Different as the two houses might appear, 
they were, however, alike in essentials. They owned 
the same ethics, they acknowledged the same stan- 
dards. Highclere could not be called conventional. 
But Eggesford, in a country which before the advent 
of the motor preserved much of the flavour of the 
past, was distinctly unconventional. The meets 
brought into the field a motley assembly of men, 

7 




Introduction 


boys, horses and ponies, such as probably outside 
Ireland could have been collected in no other comer 
of the United Kingdom. Of these not the least 
individual figure was Lord Portsmouth, probably the 
most popular M.F.H. in England. Seldom, indeed, 
can goodwill to men of goodwill have been more 
clearly writ large on a human countenance than 
on this great gentleman’s, whose very raciness of 
expression only the more endeared him to the 
Hunt. 

In later life Lord Carnarvon’s friends often noted 
with amusement his fondness for those they describe 
as “ quaint personalities.” It may be that this taste 
owed its origin to those holiday hours spent waiting 
for the fox in spinneys, and by larch woods dappled 
with the early greenery of the incomparable West 
Country spring-tide. Perhaps it was there also that 
he received lessons in a less facile art than the obser- 
vation of the quaint and curious. The perfect ease 
of friendship, a friendship that excludes alike patron- 
age and familiarity, was the keynote of the old 
M.F.H.’s intercourse with man, woman, and child 
on those mornings. It was much the same keynote 
that governed Lord Carnarvon’s relations with persons 
whose circumstances and mentality might seem to 
set a wide distance between them. Those who 
travelled with him on his annual journey — or 
progress rather — from Paddington to Highclere at 
Christmas can never forget the warmth of greet- 
ings his presence called forth in the railway 
employees of all grades, from inspectors to engine- 
drivers. The festival gave them and gave him an 
opportunity of expressing their feeling, their genuine 
feeling for one another. It is no exaggeration to 

8 




Introduction 


say that it was a moving scene, singularly appro- 
priate to the celebration of the great family feast 
of the year. 

A private school and Eton are the successive steps 
which automatically prepare a boy in Porchester’s 
position for a future career. His private school 
was not happily chosen. It subsisted on its former 
reputation, and neither diet nor instruction was up 
to the mark, but he was at least fortunate in emerging 
alive from an epidemic of measles, which the boys 
treated by pouring jugs of cold water on each other 
when uncomfortably feverish. 

To the end Eton retained in his eyes that glamour 
which marks the true Etonian, and his tutor, Mr. 
Marindin, shared in that affection. Yet it was 
something of a misfortune that school did nothing 
for the formation of methodical habits in a boy 
endowed with an exceptionally fine memory and 
unusual quickness. It would, for instance, have 
been a blessing if an expensive education had taught 
him to answer his letters. Thus, on one occasion, 
literary circles rang with the wrathful denunciations 
of a distinguished critic, who had vainly applied to 
Lord Carnarvon, as heir to the eighteenth -century 
Lord Chesterfield, for information regarding that 
statesman’s relations with Montesquieu. It was 
known that the author of “ L’Esprit des Lois ” had 
visited either Chesterfield House or Bretby, where 
it was presinned that some trace of the visit might 
be found. On inquiry it transpired that Lord Car- 
narvon had spent hours, if not days, searching the 
library at Bretby, a library collected entirely by 
Lord Chesterfield, for any vestiges of Montesquieu. 
But the search having proved vain, it had not 

e 9 




Introduction 


occurred to Carnarvon to send a postcard to that 
effect — if only to point out how much trouble he 
had taken on an unknown stranger’s behalf. 

Before he left home for school, tutors and 
governesses had pronounced Porchy to be idle ; and 
probably, as in the case of most active young 
creatures, it was no easy task to hold his sustained 
attention. Yet, judged by the less exacting 
standards of the present day, a child of ten 
would now scarcely be considered backward who 
was bilingual — French being the language used 
with mother and teachers — was possessed of a fair 
knowledge of German, the Latin Grammar, and the 
elements of Greek, and sang charmingly to the old 
tin kettle of a schoolroom piano. Labels are 
fatal things. Once labelled idle it is the pupil 
and not the instructor who earns the blame. 
Perhaps also the perfection of the father’s scholar- 
ship was a stumbling-block to the son. It is one 
of life’s little ironies, on which schoolmasters should 
ponder, that a man destined to reveal a whole 
chapter of the Ancient World to the twentieth 
century, frankly detested the classics as taught at 
Eton. 

The fourth Earl was too sensible to insist on his 
son pursuing indefinitely studies doomed to failure. 
Porchester left Eton early to study with a tutor at 
home and abroad what would now be called the 
“ modern side.” The amount of strenuous scientific 
work achieved in the little laboratory by the side 
of the lake at Highclere or during walking tours 
through the Black Forest was probably small ; but 
at any rate these two wanderjahren left him in 
possession of a store of miscellaneous information 

io 




Introduction 


seldom accumulated by the average schoolboy — 
the very material to stimulate his natural versa- 
tility. Some months were spent at Embleton 
under the tuition of the future Bishop of London, 
Dr. Creighton, to whose memory he remained much 
attached. Work with crammers in England and at 
Hanover with a view to entering the army formed 
the next phase. The project of a military career, 
however, proved evanescent ; and in 1885 Lord 
Porchester was entered at Trinity College, Cam- 
bridge. It was characteristic that being struck with 
the beauty of the panelling in his college rooms, 
he offered the authorities to have the many coats of 
paint disfiguring the woodwork scraped off and the 
rooms restored at his own expense — an offer un- 
fortunately refused. Collecting was not then the 
universal mania it has now become, but the under- 
graduate was father to the man who was eventually 
regarded as a court of appeal by the big dealers 
in London. But long before Cambridge curiosity 
shops had been his happy hunting grounds. As a 
little lad, besides the stereotyped properties of the 
average schoolboy, the inevitable stamp album, and 
a snake — the latter housed for a whole term at 
Eton in his desk — when he had a few shillings to 
spare, blue and white cups, or specimens of cottage 
china, would be added to his store of treasures. He 
was still at Cambridge when he began collecting 
French prints and drawings, notably the Rops draw- 
ings, now highly valued by connoisseurs, then bought 
for a few francs. 

Nevertheless, at this period, sport rather than 
antiquities was the main interest of the young man’s 
life, and it is to be feared that he was more often 

u 



Introduction 


seen at Newmarket than at lectures. His father 
had recently built a villa on the Italian Riviera, 
at Porto Fino, a lonely promontory, then absolutely 
remote from tourists, as a deep chasm in the 
high road leading to the little seaport formed an 
effectual barrier to communications, save by sea, 
with the outer world, As a means of locomotion 
Porchester acquired a sailing boat, and therewith 
acquired a passion for the water. The Mediterranean 
is not the halcyon lake it is sometimes painted by 
northern imagination. Indeed, Lerici, with its tragic 
memories of Shelley, is a warning, almost within 
view of Porto Fino, of the risks that attend on the 
mariner who neglects to shorten sail when a sudden 
gust sweeps down from the over-hanging mountains. 
These squalls more than once nearly brought about 
the end of the young “ milord,” the Italian boatmen 
having a tiresome habit, at such crises, of falling 
on their knees to invoke the Madonna, while Porches- 
ter and his stolid English servant were left unassisted 
to bring the boat to harbour. 

To the born adventurer the zest of adventure 
lies in its flavour of danger, and it was the 
hazards run on these excursions that inoculated him 
with the love of seafaring. When he left Cambridge 
in 1887 he at once embarked in a sailing yacht for a 
cruise round the world, and henceforward it may be 
said that the lure of adventure never ceased to haunt 
him. From Vigo he sailed to the Cape Verde Islands, 
the West Indies, paused at Pernambuco, and then 
let drive for 42 days on end through the great solitude 
of the tropical seas till he brought up at Rio. It 
was on this voyage that he acquired the passion for 
reading, which was to be the mainstay of his existence, 

12 




Introduction 


a gain which was cheaply purchased at the cost of 
those long months spent under the Southern Cross. 
He was wont to say that, fond as he was of sport 
and motoring, he would gladly never stir out of his 
chair if only when he finished one absorbing book, 
another equally absorbing could drop into his hands. 
Thus, the curtain being rung down on his academic 
studies, the once idle undergraduate flung himself 
with avidity into the pursuit of knowledge, and 
especially of history, certain periods of which he 
studied with the meticulous research of a professor 
preparing a course of lectures. 

Life on board the Aphrodite was not, however, 
solely dedicated to placid readings of successive 
series of improving tomes. There are bound to be 
pleasant and unpleasant episodes on a long voyage 
and the young man had his fill of both. In a high 
gale, while the captain lay unconscious and delirious, 
Porchester took command, and luck and a good first 
mate being with him, brought the yacht safe to land. 
Again, when one of the crew injured himself, and 
the ship’s doctor was forced to operate, it was Por- 
chester who, his finger on the man’s pulse, adminis- 
tered the chloroform with the neatness and calm of 
a professional anaesthetist. At Buenos Aires, then 
in the floodtide of prosperity, with two Italian Opera 
companies performing nightly to Argentine million- 
aires, the young Englishman met with a cordial 
welcome from all classes of the community, native 
and foreign alike. In the style of the traditional 
“ milord ” he feasted the President on the Aphrodite 
— the first yacht to cast anchor in Argentine waters 
— while he also made friends with men of business, 
the Admiral commanding the British Squadron and 

13 



Introduction 


the Italian Opera singers. He rather plumed himself 
on the latter company having once called on him 
to replace their missing accompanist at a rehearsal; 
he admitted — for he loved telling a story against 
himself — that the request was never repeated, as he 
insisted on taking the artists according to his, 
rather than according to their, notion of time. 

Of all these acquaintances and friendships Admiral 
Kennedy’s undoubtedly was the most valuable, since 
it was thanks to his vigorous remonstrances that 
Porchester finally abandoned his projected journey 
through the Straits of Magellan, which, at the wrong 
time of year and in a sailing boat, the admiral de- 
clared to be suicidal. The complete tour of the world 
planned by Porchester therefore failed, but the 
journey was rich in experiences of all kinds to a young 
man fresh from college. 

From Buenos Aires, Porchester returned in some- 
what leisurely manner homewards. Many of the 
places he visited were terra incognita to the English- 
man of that date, and even now are unfamiliar to 
the average tourist. In the Great War he was one 
of the few people able to give a first-hand description 
of the scene of the battle at the Falkland Islands, 
where he had predicted that the decisive fight for 
the control of the South Atlantic must take place. 

From these early travels he brought back, how- 
ever, something more than acquaintance with the 
waste places of the earth, beautiful scenery or strange 
types of humanity. In these wanderings he also 
saw something of the elemental conditions of life, 
where a man’s hand must needs keep his head, an 
experience too often denied to the rich man of our 
latter-day civilization. A bibliophile, a collector of 

M 




Introduction 


china and drawings and, indeed, of all things rare 
and beautiful, with a fine taste intensified by obser- 
vation and study, his happiest hours were probably 
those when the unsought adventure called for rapid 
decision and prompt action. But it should be under- 
stood that the adventure must be unsought, for no 
one was ever less cast in the mould of a Don Quixote. 
His courage was of that peculiar calm variety which 
means a pleasurable quickening of the pulse in 
the hour of danger. 

On one occasion in his youth he hired a boat to 
take him somewhere off the coast to his ship lying 
far out to sea. He was alone, steering the little 
bark rowed by a couple of stalwart fishermen. 
Suddenly, when far removed from land, and equally 
distant from his goal, the two ruffians gave him the 
choice between payment of a large sum or being 
pitched into the water. He listened quietly, and 
motioned to them to pass his dressing-bag. They 
obeyed, already in imagination fingering the English 
“Lord’s” ransom. The situation was, however, re- 
versed when he extracted, not a well-stuffed pocket- 
book, but a revolver, and pointing it at the pair 
sternly bade them row on, or he would shoot. The 
chuckle with which he recalled what was to him an 
eminently delectable episode, still remains with his 
hearer. 

Truth compels his biographer to admit that he 
did not always emerge so triumphantly from his 
adventures. His next long journey was to South 
Africa. From Durban he wrote to the present writer, 
announcing his intention to go elephant hunting ; 
and hunting he went, but the^ parts of hunter and 
hunted were reversed. Accompanied by a single 

15 



Introduction 


black, he lay in wait in the jungle for an elephant, 
and in due course the beast made his appearance. 
Porchester, generally an admirable shot, fired and 
missed him, and after a time, seeing no more of his 
quarry, slid down the tree where he was perched, 
intending to amble quietly homewards. To do this, 
he had to cross a piece of bare veldt which cut the 
forest in two. He was well in the middle of this 
shelterless tract, when he perceived that he was 
being stalked by the elephant, saw he had no time 
to re-load, and took to his heels with a speed he had 
never imagined he could compass. His rifle, his 
cartridge pouch, his glasses, his coat were all flung 
away as he ran for dear life, with the vindictive 
beast pounding on behind him. To him, as to the 
Spaniard, haste, on foot at least, had always been 
of the devil. Yet now, with life as the goal, it was 
he who won the race. He reached the friendly jungle, 
again climbed a tree and was saved. To be chased 
by an elephant and escape, he was afterwards told, 
was a more unusual feat than to bring one down to 
his gun. Eventually, he became one of the half- 
dozen best shots in England, but never again did 
he go elephant hunting. 

The journey to South Africa was followed by 
another to Australia and Japan, whence Porchester 
returned in the early summer of 1890, happily just in 
time to be with his father, during Lord Carnarvon’s 
last illness and death. 

The new lord was only 23 when he entered on 
his heritage, and save that his passion for sport kept 
him at Highclere and Bretby during the shooting 
season, and his love of the Opera for a few weeks in 
London during the summer, he remained constant 

16 




Introduction 


to his love of travel. He would suddenly dash off 
to Paris or Constantinople, Sweden, Italy or Berlin, 
for long or short periods, returning home equally 
unexpectedly, having collected pictures and books 
and any number of acquaintances and friends, some 
of whose names, unfamiliar then, have since loomed 
as large in the world’s history as they did in the 
young traveller’s tales. Not that at this phase he 
was unduly communicative. He rather affected the 
allusive style, as “ when I saw the chief of the Mafia 
in Naples ” — a style eminently adapted to whet 
curiosities which he would then smilingly put by, to 
the despair of a hearer who naturally wished to know 
how he came across that mysterious potentate. His 
sense of fun made him more explicit with regard to 
his efforts to achieve acquaintance with another lurid 
character. This was no other than the late Sultan 
“ Abdul the Damned,” with whom during one of 
his visits to Constantinople, Carnarvon was seized 
with a desire to obtain an interview. Carnarvon’s 
wardrobe was never his strong point. He had no 
uniform, but he furbished up a yacht jacket with 
extra brass buttons and hoped his attire would pass 
muster with the Chamberlain’s department. His 
name having been submitted through the Embassy 
to the proper quarters, he was informed that an 
equerry and a carriage would convey him to the 
Yildiz Kiosk. On the appointed day the official 
made his appearance wearing, however, an embar- 
rassed air, for he had to explain that H.M., though 
profoundly desolated, found himself unable to receive 
his lordship. “ Perhaps another day ? ” — “ No, the 
Sultan feared no other day was available, but 
as a slight token of his esteem, he begged Lord 

17 




Introduction 


Carnarvon’s acceptance of the accompanying high 
order.” Carnarvon declined the order, which he 
would certainly never have worn, and was left 
equally vexed and puzzled. It took some time to 
arrive at any explanation, but at last this was 
achieved. 

His father, the fourth Earl of Carnarvon, had 
travelled extensively in Turkey, with the result that 
he retained a profound horror of the misgovernment 
of that unhappy country and an equally profound 
sympathy for the persecuted Christian races. He 
became the Chairman of the Society for the Pro- 
tection of the Armenians and was regarded as one of 
their chief sympathizers. This was known to Abdul, 
though neither he nor his ministers had realized 
that this Lord Carnarvon was dead, and that a 
young man, bearing his name indeed, but otherwise 
not having inherited his political views or influence, 
was the English lord who had requested an audience 
of the Sultan. Abdul lived in perpetual dread of 
assassination, and in especial of assassination by 
one of the race he had so cruelly persecuted. He 
therefore jumped to the conclusion that Lord Car- 
narvon had asked for an interview with the purpose 
of killing him, and firmly declined to allow the 
supposed desperado to enter his presence. Lovers 
of history, like Carnarvon, are anxious to come face 
to face with those who, for good or ill, are the 
makers of history. Consequently he was genuinely 
disappointed at the failure to see one of the 
ablest though most sinister of these latter-day 
figures. But the notion of his father, of all men, 
being regarded as a potential murderer was too 
ludicrous not to outweigh the vexation, and he 

18 




Introduction 


frequently had a quiet laugh over this side of the 
story. 

In later life, when he was largely thrown into 
their company, “ The Lord,” or “ Lordy ” as he 
was called by the Egyptians, contrived to establish 
more points of contact with Orientals of all classes 
from pasha to fellah than is usually possible to the 
Western man. But indeed he had an undeniable 
charm, which, when he chose to exert it, attracted 
the confidence of men and women all the world over. 
An instance in point which also illustrates the mingled 
shrewdness and whimsicality of his character con- 
cerned a visit to California. On his way thither he 
paused in New York, where he had promised a friend 
he would try to obtain information respecting a 
certain commercial undertaking. The fashion in 
which he sought for information was, to say the 
least, highly original. For it was of his hair-cutter 
that he inquired as to the person in control of the 
venture. The hair-cutter having proved, strange 
to say, able to enlighten him on the subject, Lord 
Carnarvon wrote a note to the financier in question 
requesting an interview. In due course he was 
received by a typical captain of industry, with 
eyes like gimlets and a mouth like a steel trap, 
who must have admired the candour of the stray 
Englishman asking him straight out for advice. 
The magnate listened courteously to his request for 
information and then unequivocally urged him on 
no account to touch the stocks. Carnarvon looked 
hard at him, thanked him, and went straight off 
to the telegraph office, where he cabled instructions 
to buy. He then departed to California, where he 
fished rapturously — he delighted in all varieties of 

19 



Introduction 


sport — for tarpon. Six weeks later he returned to 
New York to find that the shares had soared upwards, 
and that his city friend was in ecstasies at the profit 
made owing to Carnarvon’s decision. He then asked 
for another interview with the financier, and was 
again civilly received. This time, Carnarvon ex- 
plained that he felt he could not leave America 
without returning thanks for advice which had proved 
so profitable that it had defrayed the expenses of a 
very costly trip. The magnate stared and exclaimed, 
“ But Lord Carnarvon, I advised you against buying.” 
“ Oh, yes, I know you said that, but of course I saw 
that you wished me to understand the reverse.” 
There was a moment’s pause and then the great 
man burst into a roar of laughter, held out his hand 
and said, “ Pray consider this house your home 
whenever you return to America.” “ And was your 
captain of industry the most interesting person you 
met on that journey ? ” his hearer inquired. “ Oh 
dear no ! ” was the characteristic reply, “ the most 
interesting man by far was the brakesman on the 
railway cars to California. I spent hours talking 
with him.” 

In 1894 Lord Carnarvon chartered the steam 
yacht Catarina, and in company with his friend 
Prince Victor Duleep Singh again visited South 
America. On his return in the summer of 1895 on 
his 29th birthday he married Miss Almina Wombwell. 
The marriage was celebrated at St. Margaret’s, West- 
minster; the wedding breakfast took place at Lans- 
downe House. All was sumptuous. The very pretty 
bride might well have sat as a model to Greuze, 
and the bridegroom’s singular air of distinction 
was no less marked than her good looks. Moreover, 

80 




Introduction 


he had been persuaded to order and to wear a frock 
coat for the great occasion. But when they set off 
for Highclere with its triumphal arches and its 
cheering tenants, the bride herself wearing rose- 
coloured gauze bespangled with emeralds and dia- 
monds, Lord Carnarvon thankfully reverted to his 
straw hat and his favourite blue serge jacket, which 
the devoted old housekeeper, his mother’s maid, had 
(much to her own scandal) darned that selfsame 
morning ! The funny little detail was eminently 
characteristic, for though his fastidious taste wel- 
comed all that made for the refinements of existence, 
with regard to himself he preserved intact his own 
curious simplicity. 

During the next eight or ten years the couple 
lived the usual life, as it was lived in those cheerful 
pre-war days, of young folk whose lot has been cast 
in pleasant places. In 1898, much to their rejoicing, 
a son, Henry, Lord Porchester, was born to them, 
followed in 1901 by a daughter, Evelyn, destined 
to become her father’s dearest friend and close 
companion in the last eventful and fatal journey to 
Egypt. 

About 1890 Lord Carnarvon took up racing in 
which he soon became deeply interested, for he was 
incapable of giving half-hearted attention to any 
business or pursuit. Ultimately [his main interest 
lay in his stud farm where he was considered for- 
tunate. He won some of the big races ; many of the 
Ascot stakes, the Steward’s Cup [at Goodwood, 
the Doncaster Cup and the City and Suburban. 
He was a member of the Jockey Club. 

Undoubtedly, especially as he grew older, the- 
human element accounted for a large proportion of 
21 




Introduction 


the entertainment he derived from the Turf. Apart 
from his friendships with those of his own world, 
he was genuinely interested in the many “ quaint 
personalities ” known to him, one and all, by nick- 
names he never forgot, and into whose domestic 
lives, joys and anxieties he was initiated. When 
the spare figure, unmistakably that of a gentleman, 
appeared in the paddock or on the racecourse, wearing 
a unique sort of low-crowned felt hat, of a shape never 
seen on any head but his, his throat in all weathers 
muffled in a yellow scarf, and shod, whatever the 
smartness of the meeting, with brown shoes — “ that 
fellow’s d — d brown shoes ” as a great personage, 
noted for his observance of the ritual of dress, 
once described them — he could count on a special 
welcome as peculiar to himself as his dress and his 
presence. 

This is perhaps the place to say something of his 
friendships, which were indeed an integral part of 
himself. No man ever laid more to heart Polonius’s 
axioms on that momentous side of life ; and un- 
doubtedly it was with “ links of steel ” that he 
grappled to himself his “ friends and their affections 
tried.” As one of the most distinguished of these 
writes, “ He was a very firm friend. It perhaps took 
a long time before one was admitted to his friendship, 
but once admittance was granted it was for always 
and for ever. Nothing would change or weaken his 
friendship. Those thus privileged knew well that 
even if separated for years, the bonds of his friendship 
existed as strong as ever, and when they met again, 
they would be met as if they had never been parted 
from him.” It is, indeed, true that nothing could 
weaken his friendship. One of the few occasions on 
22 




introduction 


which the present writer saw him break down was 
when he was forced to confess that a very dear 
friend, recently dead, had abused his confidence. 
But even then he would not reveal what the offence 
had been. He jealously guarded the man’s repu- 
tation, nor, cut to the heart as he was, would 
he allow the man’s dependants to suffer for his 
fault. It was only years afterward that by a 
mere chance his hearer was put into possession of 
the facts, and was enabled to estimate the magni- 
tude of the injury and the generosity of the 
injured. 

A man who is generous in thought is bound also 
to be generous in deed. The number of lame dogs 
he helped over stiles will never be known, for he 
religiously obeyed the Evangelical precept not to 
allow his right hand to know what his left hand did. 
Only occasionally when he felt he could trust his 
hearer would his sense of humour get the better of 
his discretion. 

Thus, one of his old tenants, whose farm was 
rented at £727 11s. 4d. a year, for three years in 
succession brought exactly £27 11s. 4d. to the annual 
audit, and quite honestly considered that he was 
entitled to receive a discharge in full. When this 
happened for the third time, and as evidently the 
land was going to rack and ruin, Lord Carnarvon 
felt he must give the man notice. It was not an over- 
rented holding, he anxiously explained, since no 
sooner was his decision known, than he received an 
offer of £1,100. “ But,” he added, “ I was so sorry 

for the poor old fellow, who had spent his life 
on the place, that I arranged to give him a sort 
of pension of £250. I thought it would be a com- 

*3 



Introduction 


fort.” But for the farmer’s singular views on the 
balancing of accounts, which appealed to Carnarvon’s 
sense of humour, the little tale would have remained 
untold. 

The same loyal fidelity which bound his affections 
in perpetuity to his family, his sisters and brothers 
and friends, made him an admirable master and a 
true friend to his servants. He falsified, rather 
amusingly, the proverb that a man cannot be a 
hero to his valet. Short of a serious fault, once a 
man entered his employment, he remained in it for 
life, but on the condition that he gave good service. 
That Lord Carnarvon expected, and that he got. 
In the same way, being courteous and considerate 
himself, he expected civility in return. He was 
seldom disappointed, for, as he said in his last letter 
to the present writer, “ it is wonderful what a little 
politeness can do.” But meeting with rudeness, he 
could give a rebuke which, for being rather obliquely 
delivered, Avas none the less effective. In the war, 
having occasion to go to one of the Control Depart- 
ments, he was received by a damsel with “ bobbed ” 
hair and bobbed manners who, in a voice of utter 
scorn, demanded to know on Avhat business he could 
have come. Since no human being could enter the 
Department save for the one purpose of obtaining 
the commodity in which the Control dealt, the ques- 
tion, apart from the fashion in Avhich it was delivered, 
was an impertinence. In the sweetest of voices, 
Lord Carnarvon replied, “ Of course, I have come to 
talk to you about the hippopotamus in the Zoo ” 
— after which speech his business was put through 
in double-quick time. 

A fine shot, an owner of race-horses, a singularly 

* 4 



Introduction 


well inspired art collector — his privately printed 
catalogue of rare books is a model of its kind — Lord 
Carnarvon was also a pioneer of motoring. He owned 
cars in France before they were allowed in England. 
In fact, his was the third motor registered in this 
country, after the repeal of the act making it obliga- 
tory for all machine-propelled carriages to be pre- 
ceded on the high road by a man carrying a red 
flag. Motoring was bound to appeal to one of his 
disposition, and he threw himself with passion into 
the new sport. He was a splendid driver, well 
served by his gift — a gift which also served him 
in shooting and golf — of judging distances accurately, 
whilst possessing that unruffled calm in difficulties 
which often, if not invariably, is the best insurance 
against disaster. 

Though Carnarvon enjoyed a reputation for reck- 
lessness he was in reality far too collected and had 
too much common sense to woo danger. When 
the present writer reproached him for taking un- 
necessary risks, he replied : “ Do you take me for 
a fool ? In motoring the danger lies round corners, 
and I never take a corner fast.” This was probably 
true, but the “ best-laid schemes o’ mice and men 
gang aft a-gley,” and it was on a perfectly straight 
road that he met with the accident that materially 
affected his whole life. 

It was on a journey through Germany that disaster 
overtook Carnarvon. He and his devoted chauffeur, 
Edward Trotman, who accompanied him on all 
his expeditions for eight - and - twenty years, had 
been flying for many miles along an empty road, 
ruled with Roman precision through an interminable 
Teutonic forest, towards Schwalbach, where Lady 

© 25 




Introduction 


Carnarvon was awaiting their arrival. Before them, 
as behind, the highway still stretched out, when, 
suddenly, as they crested a rise, they were confronted 
by an unexpected dip in the ground, so steep as to be 
invisible up to within 20 yards, and at the bottom, 
right across the road, were drawn up two bullock 
carts. Carnarvon did the only thing possible. Trust- 
ing to win past, he put the car at the grass margin, 
but a heap of stones caught the wheel, two tyres 
burst, the car turned a complete somersault and fell 
on the driver, while Trotman was flung clear some 
feet away. Happily for them both, the latter’s thick 
coat broke his fall, and with splendid presence of mind 
he lost not a second in coming to his master’s rescue. 
The car had fallen aslant across a ditch. Had it 
fallen on the road, Carnarvon must have been crushed 
to death, instead of being embedded head foremost 
in mud. With the energy of despair, Trotman con- 
trived to drag the light car aside and to extricate Carnar- 
von, who was unconscious, his heart even appearing 
to have stopped. The bullock drivers knowing them- 
selves in fault had bolted, but Trotman saw some 
workmen in an adjoining field, saw they had a can of 
water, and without pausing to apologize seized the 
can and dashed the water in Lord Carnarvon’s face. 
The shock set the heart beating anew, and meanwhile 
the workmen, who had followed hot-foot in pursuit 
of their can, arrived on the scene. They had no 
common language, but the awful spectacle and the 
chauffeur’s signs were sufficient explanation and they 
brought a doctor to the spot. He found a shattered 
individual, evidently suffering from severe concussion, 
his face swollen to shapelessness, his legs severely 
burnt, his wrist broken, temporarily blind, the 

2 6 




Introduction 


palate of his mouth and his jaw injured, caked in 
mud from head to foot. In fact, he was only just 
alive ; but he recovered consciousness to put the 
one question which overpowered all else, “ Have I 
killed anyone ? ” was reassured, and lapsed again into 
unconsciousness. In this condition he was carried 
to the nearest pot-house, where Lady Carnarvon, 
who almost instantly rejoined him, summoned doctors 
and surgeons to his bedside. It was characteristic 
that almost the first words he murmured when he 
had recovered speech were, “ I don’t think I have lost 
my nerve ! ” He was right, he had not lost his nerve, 
but he had lost his health. Nothing that skill or 
care could effect then or later was spared, but 
throughout the remainder of his life he suffered 
from perpetually recurrent operations and dangerous 
illnesses. He bore these with a noble courage, 
and emerged mellowed rather than embittered 
from these trials and the renunciations of work 
and ambitions curtailed. Sometimes he lapsed 
into long silences, seldom into complaints. It 
was a fine triumph of will, assisted by the sense 
of humour which was the warp and woof of his 
being. 

With regard to recreations, his versatility came 
to his help. When agonizing headaches made shoot- 
ing too painful, he took to golf, at which he was 
“ scratch.” When golf proved beyond his strength, 
he set himself to study the technique of photography, 
and aided by his artistic faculty he shortly became 
a master of the art. Indeed, in the words of an 
expert, “Carnarvon’s work was known in all parts 
of the globe where pictorial photography has an 
honoured place, and it is not too much to say that 

*7 




Introduction 


his productions were unique in their artistry and in 
the knowledge that he displayed in their production.” 
(Quarterly Journal of the Camera Club, Vol. I, 202, 
May, 1923, p. 13, by F. J. Mortimer, F.R.P.S.). In 
1916 he was elected President of the Camera Club. 
He appreciated the distinction ; but the recognition 
of his work in this field that brought him the greatest 
pleasure was a summons he received during the war 
to the Front to advise Royal Headquarters Flying 
Corps on the subject of aerial photography. The 
three days he spent at St. Andre went a little way, 
though only a little way, to console him for not 
being a combatant, and he rejoiced accordingly ; 
though on his return to England he paid for the 
effort with a sharp attack of illness. He had 
always been attracted by mechanical inventions. 
It was under Beacon Hill, on his property, that 
Captain de Haviland constructed the first aero- 
plane, which in its perfected form of D.H.9 became 
the chief fighting aeroplane in the war. 

Nevertheless, strive as he would, the renunciations 
involved were not inconsiderable. He was deeply 
interested in the elections of 1905 and 1910 and the 
House of Lords controversy of 1911 ; and he would 
probably have taken an active part in politics but 
for his belief that the serious injury to his mouth and 
jaw must militate against public speaking. He may 
have exaggerated this drawback, for, when he de- 
livered his lecture at the Central Hall, Westminster, 
on January 11th, 1923, he was easily heard by a large 
audience. But he disliked doing things badly, 
and his fear of being indistinct, added to his many 
illnesses, extinguished his hope of entering public 
life. Many of his friends both now and then regretted 

28 




Introduction 


this forced abstention from the public life of the 
country. Sir William Garstin, whose verdict must 
carry weight, writes, “ Lord Carnarvon took a deep 
interest in all questions connected with English 

politics, but it was the foreign policy of this country 
that more particularly interested him. His exten- 
sive travels, as well as his studies, gave him a grasp 
of the subjects connected with ‘ World policy ’ that 
is unusual in Englishmen who live much of their lives 
at home. Perhaps the politics of the Near East 
attracted him more than those of any other country 
His frequent visits to Turkey and the Balkan States, 
and his recognition of the ties that closely bind 
England with these nations, gave him a direct 

personal interest in the questions. He certainly 

Qould and did talk well and intelligently upon every- 
thing connected with England’s relations with Turkey 
and the East.” 

The net result of the accident was the necessity 
to winter out of England, since, with his difficulty 
of breathing, a bad attack of bronchitis would 
probably have proved fatal. In 1903 he con- 

sequently went to Egypt and was at once 
captivated by the fascination of “ digging.” An 
unfinished fragment on the subject, on which he 
was engaged at his death, gives an account of 
these early days: 

“ It had always been my wish and intention even 
as far back as 1889 to start excavating, but for one 
reason or another I had never been able to begin. 
However, in 1906 with the aid of Sir William Garstin, 
who was then adviser to the Public Works, I started 
to excavate in Thebes. 

“ I may say that at this period I knew nothing 

*9 



Introduction 


whatever about excavating, so I suppose with the 
idea of keeping me out of mischief, as well as keeping 
me employed, I was allotted a site at the top of 
Sheikh Abdel Gurna. I had scarcely been operating 
for 24 hours when we suddenly struck what seemed 
to be an untouched burial pit. This gave rise to 
much excitement in the Antiquities Department, 
which soon simmered down when the pit w r as found 
to be unfinished. There, for six weeks, enveloped 
in clouds of dust, I stuck to it day in and day out. 
Beyond finding a large mummified cat in its case, 
which now graces the Cairo Museum, nothing what- 
soever rewarded my strenuous and very dusty en- 
deavours. This utter failure, however, instead of 
disheartening me had the effect of making me keener 
than ever.” 

The more he toiled, however, the more it 
became clear to him that he needed expert aid ; 
accordingly he consulted Sir Gaston Maspero, who 
advised him to have recourse to Mr. Howard 
Carter. 

Sir Gaston Maspero’s advice proved even more 
fruitful of good than Lord Carnarvon anticipated. 
In Mr. Howard Carter Carnarvon obtained the 
collaboration not only of a learned expert, an archaeo- 
logist gifted with imagination, and as Lord Carnarvon 
said “ a very fine artist,” but that of a true friend. 
For the next sixteen years the two men worked 
together with varying fortune, yet ever united not 
more by their common aim than by their mutual 
regard and affection. 

An account of Lord Carnarvon and Mr. Carter’s 
work is to be found in the sumptuous volume entitled 
“ Five Years’ Explorations at Thebes ” which they 




Introduction 


published in 1912. Lord Carnarvon’s description of 
the first excavations effected with Mr. Howard 
Carter should, however, find place here. “ After 
perhaps 10 days’ work at Deir el Bahari in 1907,” 
he writes, “ we came upon what proved to be an 
untouched tomb. I shall never forget the first sight 
of it. There was something extraordinarily modern 
about it. Several coffins were in the tomb, but the 
first that arrested our attention was a white bril- 
liantly painted coffin with a pall loosely thrown over 
it, and a bouquet of flowers lying just at its foot. 
There these coffins had remained untouched and 
forgotten for 2,500 years. The reason for the sepul- 
chre being inviolate was soon apparent. There was 
no funerary furniture, and evidently the owners of 
the coffins were poor people, and they or their rela- 
tions had put all the funeral money they were able 
to spend into the ornamental coffins that contained 
their bodies. 

“ One of these coffins I presented to the Newbury 
Museum. The results of this season were very poor, 
still one day we thought that we had at last found 
something which had every appearance of an un- 
touched tomb some 400 yards from the Temple of 
Deir el Bahari. In the morning, I rode out, and no 
sooner did I see Carter’s face than I knew some- 
thing unpleasant and unforeseen had occurred. 
Alas ! What looked promising the day before 
turned out to be merely a walled-up sort of stable 
where the ancient Egyptian foreman had tethered 
his donkey and kept his accounts. But this is 
a common occurrence, for in excavation it is 
generally the unexpected that happens and the 
unexpected is nearly always unpleasant.” So 

3i 


Introduction 


wrote the future revealer of Tut-anklvAmen’s 
tomb. 

In 1907 Lord Carnarvon began to form his now 
celebrated Egyptian collection. “ My chief aim,” 
he writes, “ was then, and is now, not merely to buy 
because a thing is rare, but rather to consider the 
beauty of an object than its pure historic value. 
Of course when the two, beauty and historic interest, 
are blended in a single object the interest and delight 
of possession are more than doubled.” The testimony 
of that eminent authority, Sir Ernest Budge, strikingly 
confirms Lord Carnarvon’s own account of his col- 
lection. “He only cared,” says Sir Ernest, “for 
the best, and nothing but the best would satisfy 
him, and having obtained the best he persisted in 
believing that there must be somewhere something 
better than the best. His quest for the beautiful 
in Egyptian design, form and colour became the cult 
of his life in recent years. His taste was faultless 
and his instinct for the true and genuine was un- 
rivalled. When compared with a beautiful ‘ antica ’ 
money had no value for him, and he was wont to 
say with Sir Henry Rawlinson, ‘it is easier to get 
money than anticas.’”* 

Of all the renunciations forced upon him by bad 
health the one which cost him most was his inability 
to take a personal part in the Great War. Although 
he was past military age, his quick intelligence and 
his intimate knowledge of the French language and 
French mentality would have made him a valuable 
liaison officer. Indeed, at one moment he cherished 
the hope that he might accompany his friend General 

* Tufankh'Amen, Amenism, Atemism and Egyptian Monotheism , Fref., 




Introduction 


Sir John Maxwell to the Front, but as at the moment 
the jolting of a taxi caused him almost unbearable 
pain, he had to content himself with such work as 
he could find to do at home. Nevertheless, when his 
brother Aubrey Herbert, to whom he was specially 
devoted, was wounded and lost during the retreat 
from Mons, he was preparing to go, pain or no pain, 
to hunt for him in his motor, when the news of 
Aubrey’s escape arrived. At a later stage of the war 
to attempt such an adventure would have been 
unthinkable, but at that crisis, immediately after 
the victory of the Marne, before the war had hardened 
into a war of trenches, it is just possible that Carnar- 
von’s mingled resource and calmness might have 
been successful. 

It was characteristic that quite a week before 
war was declared, being convinced that it was immi- 
nent, and believing that food shortage would be the 
immediate danger, he quietly made preparations for 
feeding the population on his property. The beauty 
of his scheme lay in the fact that it did not entail 
a run on the shops. The potatoes remained in the 
field, the corn in the ricks, though ready when the 
pinch came to be doled out, carefully rationed, to 
the little community of 253 souls for whom he held 
himself responsible. As we know, he had misdated 
that particular peril, and quick to realize his 
mistakes, he promptly turned his energies in other 
directions. 

From the very outbreak of the war, Lord and 
Lady Carnarvon converted Highclere into an officers’ 
hospital, which was subsequently transferred to 
88 Bryanston Square, and whether in town or 
country noted for the tender and efficient care of 

33 



Introduction 


its inmates. After Lady Carnarvon moved her hos- 
pital to London, Carnarvon occupied himself, amongst 
other things, in promoting the conversion of pastime 
at Highclere into arable land. He was well seconded 
by his old and attached employees, and was more 
successful than those who knew the thin chalk soil 
dared to hope. While alone, on one of his periodical 
visits to Highclere, he was seized with appendicitis. 
Lady Carnarvon accompanied by surgeons and doc- 
tors rushed down and carried him off to the hospital 
in London, where he was promptly operated upon. 
And thus in all probability it was owing to the hospital 
this husband and wife had founded that his life was 
eventually saved, for nowhere else, at that particular 
time, could he have obtained the same unremitting 
care. 

It was, however, a close call. The great surgeon, 
Sir Berkeley Moynihan, who was summoned from 
Leeds to his bedside, admitted that he himself had 
only given him another three-quarters of an hour 
to live. Lord Carnarvon afterwards declared that, 
though he realized his danger, he was convinced 
that his sufferings were too acute to allow him to 
die. True to his inextinguishable sense of humour, 
even at this crisis, he contrived to make a joke and 
was surprised that it did not seem to amuse his 
medical attendants. “ It was not much of a joke, 
but still there was a point to it and only George 
[his very devoted servant] smiled,” he complained. 
In the circumstances, the doctors might be excused, 
for it was something of a miracle when their patient 
pulled through. He himself ascribed his recovery 
to his wife’s resource and exertions and to the skill 
and devotion with which she surrounded him — 


34 




Introduction 


devotion readily given, for his nurses adored a 
patient who, even in extremis, remained considerate 
and courteous. 

Two years later, he had to undergo another 
vital operation, and again he recovered, and seemed 
to have got a firmer grip of life. By that time, 
moreover, the war had come to an end, and his only 
son, who had fought through the Mesopotamian 
campaign, was once more safe at home at his side. 
This was an untold relief to Carnarvon. He was 
too true an Englishman to grudge his boy to the 
country’s service, but in many little ways he showed 
how greatly he felt the strain. Habitually the most 
reserved of men, when one of the pencil letters 
reached him, for which so many hungry hearts 
yearned in those dark days, he would hurry round 
to read the precious epistle to a sympathetic audience. 
And from the moment of the young soldier’s em- 
barkation “ my boy’s ” little fox terrier never left 
his side. 

Carnarvon’s love for his children played a great 
part in his life. He thoroughly enjoyed their com- 
panionship, and perhaps even more the evident 
pleasure they took in his society. His love for them 
enlarged his outlook on life [as a whole, or rather 
perhaps swept away the remnant of the constitutional 
reserve which sometimes set a veil between his true 
self and the outer world. He who, as a friend said, 
“ laughed through life,” and, in especial, laughed at 
himself and his tribulations, confessed himself sur- 
prised at the extent that fear for their welfare could 
penetrate his defensive armour. When anxious 
about his daughter, his gallant little gibes deserted 
him. “ I cannot tell you how this has upset me,” 

35 



Introduction 


he wrote, “ I really can’t sleep or eat. I had no 
idea that anything could worry me so.” And 
it is doubtful whether the great discovery itself 
would not have lost half its savour if this 
daughter, his inseparable companion, had not been 
there to share in the rapture of that amazing 
revelation. 

Even during the war Lord Carnarvon had made 
efforts to get to Egypt. In fact, but for a bad attack 
of pleurisy which at the last moment detained him 
in England, he would have arrived at Cairo the very 
day the Turks made their unsuccessful onslaught on 
the Canal. Naturally, as soon as the Armistice was 
signed, he took steps to rejoin Mr. Carter, who in 
the intervals of his war work at G.H.Q. in Cairo 
had been able to start preliminary investigations in 
The Valley of the Kings. Journeys were, however, 
no easy matter in 1919. With great difficulty 
berths were procured on a boat, which was 
protected during the crossing by paravanes to 
avoid the disaster that had recently overtaken a 
French ship, sunk by a floating mine. But mines 
were a less danger than the sanitary condition of 
the boat. She had served as a troopship during 
the war, had not yet been disinfected, and was 
packed with Arabs to be landed at Bizerta. 
Happily the journey was short, but in that short 
space there was much sickness and a few deaths. 
The journey so inauspiciously begun did not im- 
prove as time went on. It was a period of unrest 
in Egypt, and it was fortunate that Carnarvon’s 
desire to explore the Fayum with a view to 
excavations brought the party back earlier than 
usual from Luxor to Cairo. Everything had been 

36 




Introduction 


arranged for the Fayum expedition, and the hour for 
the departure fixed, when, the evening before' the 
start, Carnarvon received such disquieting reports 
of the situation in the provinces that he decided to 
defer the journey. It was a lucky decision, since 
the next day witnessed the beginning of trouble in 
the Fayum, and in a day or two, as he himself 
wrote, “ the country was in a state of anarchy. 
During a lull in the general disorder,” he con- 
tinues, “ I managed to pack off my family to 
Port Said, and I well remember how relieved I 
was to get a telegram to say they had embarked 
safely.” 

As for himself he remained on for a time in Cairo, 
partly in the hope of being able to achieve some more 
digging, but also because he was genuinely interested 
in the situation. As Sir William Garstin remarks, 
“ It was Carnarvon’s interest in Egyptology that first 
drew him to Egypt. He very soon, however, became 
much interested in Egyptian politics. He had a 
great liking for the Egyptians and for those who 
were trying to restore her as a nation, and 
he showed a sympathetic interest in them to 
which they readily responded. Few Englishmen 
have been more liked in Egypt, and the sorrow 
that was evinced at his death was universal and 
sincere.” Sir William Garstin’s estimate of Lord 
Carnarvon’s position in Egypt is fully confirmed 
by Sir John Maxwell, also a great authority on 
Egyptian politics. “ He was one of the few 
Englishmen,” he says, “ who realized and appre- 
ciated what Egypt did for us during the war, and 
how difficult it would have been for us had she 
taken an unfriendly attitude ; also that a loyal, con- 

37 




Introduction 


tented friend on our Eastern communications was 
infinitely preferable to a sullen, discontented enemy. 
He was convinced that the former could be accom- 
plished. He was a good and patient listener and 
gained the confidence of many of the best class in 
Egypt. Both in London and at Highclere he enter- 
tained the Egyptian delegations. All were appreci- 
ative of his hospitality and consideration and all felt 
that, in his death, they had lost a real friend of their 
country.” 

As the days passed, it became evident, however, 
that any work for that season was out of the ques- 
tion. He was needed in England and he decided to 
leave. This was not easy and he was about to 
charter a sailing boat, when he obtained a passage 
home. Lord Carnarvon was fated to pay several 
more visits to Egypt. After his operation in 1919 
while scarcely convalescent, he insisted on leaving 
for Luxor at the usual season and there recovered 
his health and strength. 

A description of Tut-ankh-Amen’s tomb and its 
discovery does not fall within the province of this 
sketch, which concerns the man rather than the 
archaeologist. Carnar von was never addicted to self- 
analysis, and though he could give detailed de- 
scriptions of the beautiful objects discovered in the 
tomb, words failed him to express the effect on 
himself personally of the actual discovery. He 
could only assure his hearers that it was “ a 
very exciting moment ” ! Nor, unlike most events, 
as the weeks passed, did the excitement wane for 
the public or for Lord Carnarvon ; and naturally, 
perhaps, to no one more than to him did these 
successive revelations bring delight. “ He was as 

38 




Introduction 


happy as he was modest,” said a distinguished 
scholar. 

In this sad world it would seem that triumphs 
have to be paid for in weariness of soul and body. 
It was a glorious episode, but when the tomb was 
closed for the season, Lord Carnarvon was very 
tired. A mosquito bit him, the wound got poisoned, 
and though wife and daughter, doctors and nurses, 
fought valiantly for his life it was a losing fight. 
Through those long three weeks of pain and misery 
he remained his old gallant self. Readers of the 
bulletins may remember that the gloomiest generally 
concluded with an assurance that the patient’s spirits 
were good. But he himself had no illusions. “ I 
have heard the call,” he said to a friend, “ I am 
preparing.” On the 6th of April, 1923, he passed 
away. 

In his will he expressed the wish to be buried on 
Beacon Hill. It was, therefore, on the summit of 
the great down overlooking the home that he had so 
passionately loved, that he was laid to rest. Only 
his nearest and dearest, and a few workmen and 
servants, many of whom had grown grey in his service, 
stood around the grave, but these too he had ac- 
counted part of his family, and their lament, “ Of 
course, he was my master, but he was my friend 
too,” was the epitaph he would himself have chosen. 
Organ, music, choristers, there were none at this 
burying. The beautiful old office, commending “ the 
body of our dear brother to the ground in sure and 
certain hope,” had something of the stark grandeur 
of a funeral at sea. But the whole air was alive 
with the springtide song of the larks. They sang 
deliriously, in a passion of ecstasy which can never 

39 


Introduction 


be forgotten by those who heard that song. And 
so we left him, feeling that the ending was in harmony 
with the life. 

“ Here, here’s his place, where meteors shoot, clouds form, 
Lightnings are loosened, 

Stars come and go ! Let joy break the storm — 

Peace let the dew send ! 

Lofty design must close in like effects : 

Loftily lying, 

Leave him — still loftier than the World suspects. 

Living and dying.” 

WINIFRED BURGHCLERE. 


The Lake, 

Highclere, 

September 17 , 1923 . 


40 




THE TOMB OF TUT ANKH AMEN 


CHAPTER I 

The King and the Queen 

A FEW preliminary words about Tutankh- 
Amen, the king whose name the whole 
- world knows, and who in that sense prob- 
ably needs an introduction less than anyone in 
history. He was the son-in-law, as everyone knows, 
of that most written-about, and probably most over- 
rated, of all the Egyptian Pharaohs, the heretic king 
Akhen-Aten. Of his parentage we know nothing. 
He may have been of the blood royal and had some 
indirect claim to the throne on his own account. He 
may on the other hand have been a mere commoner. 
The point is immaterial, for, by his marriage to a 
king’s daughter, he at once, by Egyptian law of suc- 
cession, became a potential heir to the throne. A 
hazardous and uncomfortable position it must have 
been to fill at this particular stage of his country’s 
history. Abroad, the Empire founded in the fifteenth 
century b.c. by Thothmes III, and held, with diffi- 
culty it is true, but still held, by succeeding 
monarchs, had crumpled up like a pricked balloon. 
At home dissatisfaction was rife. The priests of the 
ancient faith, who had seen their gods flouted and 
their very livelihood compromised, were straining 
at the leash, only waiting the most convenient 
£ 41 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh'Amen 


moment to slip it altogether: the soldier class, con- 
demned to a mortified inaction, were seething with 
discontent, and apt for any form of excitement : 
the foreign harim element, women who had been 
introduced into the Court and into the families of 
soldiers in such large numbers since the wars of 
conquest, were now, at a time of weakness, a sure 
and certain focus of intrigue: the manufacturers and 
merchants, as foreign trade declined and home credit 
was diverted to a local and extremely circumscribed 
area, were rapidly becoming sullen and discontented : 
the common populace, intolerant of change, grieving, 
many of them, at the loss of their old familiar gods, 
and ready enough to attribute any loss, deprivation, 
or misfortune, to the jealous intervention of these 
offended deities, were changing slowly from bewilder- 
ment to active resentment at the new heaven and 
new earth that had been decreed for them. And 
through it all Akh-en-Aten, Gallio of Gallios, dreamt 
his life away at Tell el Amarna. 

The question of a successor was a vital one for 
the whole country, and we may be sure that in- 
ti'igue was rampant. Of male heirs there was none, 
and interest centres on a group of little girls, the 
eldest of whom could not have been more than 
fifteen at the time of her father’s death. Young 
as she was, this eldest princess, Mert-Aten by name, 
had already been married some little while, for in 
the last year or two of Akh en- Aten’s reign we find 
her husband associated with him as co-regent, a 
vain attempt to avert the crisis which even the 
arch-dreamer Akh en-Aten must have felt to be in- 
evitable. Her taste of queenship was but a short 
one, for Smenkh-ka-Re, her husband, died within a 

4 * 






The King and the Queen 


short while of Akh-en- Aten. He may even, as evi- 
dence in this tomb seems to show, have predeceased 
him, and it is quite possible that he met his death 
at the hands of a rival faction. In any case he 
disappears, and his wife with him, and the throne 
Was open to the next claimant. 

The second daughter, Makt-Aten, died unmarried 
in Akh-en- Aten’s lifetime. The third, Ankh-es-en-pa* 
Aten, was married to Tut- ankh- Aten as he then v as, 
the Tut-ankh-Amen with whom we are now so 
familiar. Just when this marriage took place is not 
certain. It may have been in Akh-en- Aten’s life- 
time, or it may have been contracted hastily im- 
mediately after his death, to legalize his claim to the 
throne. In any event they were but children. 
Ankh-es-en-pa- Aten was born in the eighth year of 
her father’s reign, and therefore cannot have been 
more than ten ; and we have reason to believe, from 
internal evidence in the tomb, that Tut-ankh-Amen 
himself was little more than a boy. Clearly in the 
first years of this reign of children there must have 
been a power behind the throne, and we can be 
tolerably certain who this power was. In all coun- 
tries, but more particularly in those of the Orient, 
it is a wise rule, in cases of doubtful or weak suc- 
cession, to pay particular attention to the move- 
ments of the most powerful Court official. In the 
Tell el Amarna Court this was a certain Ay, Chief 
Priest, Court Chamberlain, and practically Court 
everything else. He himself was a close personal 
friend of Akh-en- Aten’s, and his wife Tyi was nurse 
to the royal wife Nefertiti, so we may be quite sure 
there was nothing that went on in the palace that 
they did not know. Now, looking ahead a little we 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


find that it was this same Ay who secured the throne 
himself after Tut-ankh-Amen’s death. We also know, 
from the occurrence of his cartouche in the sepul- 
chral chamber of the newly found tomb, that he 
made himself responsible for the burial ceremonies 
of Tut-ankh-Amen, even if he himself did not actually 
construct the tomb. It is quite unprecedented in 
The Valley to find the name of a succeeding king 
upon the walls of his predecessor’s sepulchral monu- 
ment. The fact that it was so in this case seems 
to imply a special relationship between the two, and 
we shall probably be safe in assuming that it was 
Ay who was largely responsible for establishing the 
boy king upon the throne. Quite possibly he had 
designs upon it himself already, but, not feeling 
secure enough for the moment, preferred to bide his 
time and utilize the opportunities he would un- 
doubtedly have, as minister to a young and inex- 
perienced sovereign, to consolidate his position. It 
is interesting to speculate, and when we remember 
that Ay in his turn was supplanted by another of 
the leading officials of Akh-en- Aten’s reign, the 
General Hor-em-heb, and that neither of them had 
any real claim to the throne, we can be reasonably 
sure that in this little by-way of history, from 
1375 to 1350 b.c., there was a well set stage for 
dramatic happenings. 

However, as self-respecting historians, let us put 
aside the tempting “ might have beens ” and 
“ probably s ” and come back to the cold hard facts 
of history. What do we really know about this 
Tut-ankh-Amen with whom we have become so 
surprisingly familiar ? Remarkably little, when you 
come right down to it. In the present state of our 

44 



The King and the Queen 


knowledge we might say with truth that the one out- 
standing feature of his life was the fact that he 
died and was buried. Of the man himself — if indeed 
he ever arrived at the dignity of manhood — and of 
his personal character we know nothing. Of the 
events of his short reign we can glean a little, a 
very little, from the monuments. We know, for 
instance, that at some time during his reign he 
abandoned the heretic capital of his father-in-law, 
and removed the Court back to Thebes. That he 
began as an Aten worshipper, and reverted to the old 
religion, is evident from his name Tut-ankh-Aten, 
changed to Tut -ankh Amen, and from the fact that 
he made some slight additions and restorations to 
the temples of the old gods at Thebes. There is also 
a stela in the Cairo Museum, which originally stood in 
one of the Karnak temples, in which he refers to 
these temple restorations in somewhat grandiloquent 
language. “ I found,” he says, “ the temples fallen 
into ruin, with their holy places overthrown, and 
their courts overgrown with weeds. I reconstructed 
their sanctuaries, I re-endowed the temples, and 
made them gifts of all precious things. I cast statues 
of the gods in gold and electrum, decorated with 
lapis lazuli and all fine stones .” 1 We do not know 
at what particular period in his reign this change 
of religion took place, nor whether it was due to 
personal feeling or was dictated to him for political 
reasons. We know from the tomb of one of his 
officials that certain tribes in Syria and in the Sudan 
were subject to him and brought him tribute, and on 


i This stela, parts of which are roughly translated above, was sub- 
equently usurped by Hor*em-heb, as were almost all Tut-ankh*Amen’s 
monuments. 


45 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


many of the objects in his own tomb we see him 
trampling with great gusto on prisoners of war, and 
shooting them by hundreds from his chariot, but we 
must by no means take for granted that he ever 
in actual fact took the field himself. Egyptian mon- 
archs were singularly tolerant of such polite fictions. 

That pretty well exhausts the facts of his life as 
we know them from the monuments. From his tomb, 
so far, there is singularly little to add. We are 
getting to know to the last detail what he had, but 
of what he was and what he did we are still sadly 
to seek. There is nothing yet to give us the exact 
length of his reign. Six years we knew before as a 
minimum : much more than that it cannot have 
been. We can only hope that the inner chambers 
will be more communicative. His body, if, as we 
hope and expect, it still lies beneath the shrines 
within the sepulchre, will at least tell us his age 
at death, and may possibly give us some clue to 
the circumstances. 

Just a word as to his wife, Ankh-es-en pa-Aten as 
she was known originally, and Ankh-es en Amcn 
after the reversion to Thebes. As the one through 
whom the king inherited, she was a person of con- 
siderable importance, and he makes due acknow- 
ledgment of the fact by the frequency with which 
her name and person appear upon the tomb furniture. 
A graceful figure she was, too, unless her portraits 
do her more than justice, and her friendly relations 
with her husband are insisted on in true Tell el 
Amama style. There are two particularly charming 
representations of her. In one, on the back of the 
throne (Plate II), she anoints her husband with per- 
fume : in the other, she accompanies him on a shooting 







The King and the Queen 


expedition, and is represented crouching at his feet, 
handing him an arrow with one hand, and with the 
other pointing out to him a particularly fat duck 
which she fears may escape his notice. Charming 
pictures these, and pathetic, too, when we remember 
that at seventeen or eighteen years of age the wife 
was left a widow. Well, perhaps. On the other 
hand, if we know our Orient, perhaps not, for to 
this story there is a sequel, provided for us by a 
number of tablets, found some years ago in the 
ruins of Boghozkeui, and only recently deciphered. 
An interesting little tale of intrigue it outlines, and 
in a few words we get a clearer picture of Queen 
Ankh-es-en-Amen than Tut-ankh-Amen was able to 
achieve for himself in his entire equipment of funeral 
furniture. 

She was, it seems, a lady of some force of 
character. The idea of retiring into the background 
in favour of a new queen did not appeal to her, 
and immediately upon the death of her husband she 
began to scheme. She had, we may presume, at 
least two months’ grace, the time that must elapse 
between Tut-ankh-Amen’s death and burial, for until 
the last king was buried it was hardly likely that 
the new one would take over the reins. Now, in 
the past two or three reigns there had been con- 
stant intermarriages between the royal houses of 
Egypt and Asia. One of Ankh-cs-en-Amen’s sisters 
had been sent in marriage to a foreign court, and 
many Egyptologists think that her own mother was 
an Asiatic princess. It was not surprising, then, 
that in this crisis she should look abroad for help, 
and we find her writing a letter to the King of 
the Hittites in the following terms : “ My husband 

47 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


is dead and I am told that you have grown-up 
sons. Send me one of them, and I will make him 
my husband, and he shall be king over Egypt.” 

It was a shrewd move on her part, for there 
was no real heir to the throne in Egypt, and the 
swift dispatch of a Hittite prince, with a reason- 
able force to back him up, would probably have 
brought off a very successful coup. Promptitude, 
however, was the one essential, and here the queen 
was reckoning without the Hittite king. Hurry 
in any matter was v r ell outside his calculations. 
It would never do to be rushed into a scheme of 
this sort without due deliberation, and how did 
he know that the letter was not a trap ? So he 
summoned his counsellors and the matter was talked 
over at length. Eventually it was decided to send 
a messenger to Egypt to investigate the truth of 
the story. “ Where,” he writes in his reply — and 
you can see him patting himself on the back for his 
shrewdness — “is the son of the late king, and w'hat 
has become of him ? ” 

Now, it took some fourteen days for a messenger 
to go from one country to the other, so the poor 
queen’s feelings can be imagined, when, after a month's 
waiting, she received, in answer to her request, not 
a prince and a husband, but a dilatory futile letter. 
In despair she writes again : “ Why should I deceive 
you ? I have no son, and my husband is dead. Send 
me a son of yours and I will make him king.” The 
Hittite king now decides to accede to her request and 
to send a son, but it is evidently too late. The time 
had gone by. The document breaks off here, and 
it is left to our imagination to fill in the rest of the 
story. > • 




The King and the Queen 


Did the Hittite prince ever start for Egypt, and 
how far did he get ? Did Ay, the new king, get 
wind of Ankh-es-emAmen’s schemings and take 
effectual steps to bring them to naught ? We shall 
never know. In any case the queen disappears from 
the scene and we hear of her no more. It is a fasci- 
nating little tale. Had the plot succeeded there 
would never have been a Rameses the Great. 


49 




CHAPTER II 

The Valley and the Tomb 

T HE Valley of the Tombs of the Kings — the 
very name is full of romance, and of all 
Egypt’s wonders there is none, I suppose, 
that makes a more instant appeal to the imagination. 
Here, in this lonely valley -head, remote from every 
sound of life, with the “ Horn,” the highest peak 
in the Theban hills, standing sentinel like a natural 
pyramid above them, lay thirty or more kings, 
among them the greatest Egypt ever knew. Thirty 
were buried here. Now, probably, but two remain 
— Amen-hetep II — whose mummy may be seen by 
the curious lying in his sarcophagus — and Tut ankh- 
Amen, who still remains intact beneath his golden 
shrine. There, when the claims of science have been 
satisfied, we hope to leave him lying. 

I do not propose to attempt a word picture of 
The Valley itself — that has been done too often in 
the past few months. I would like, however, to 
devote a certain amount of time to its history, for 
that is essential to a proper understanding of our 
present tomb. 

Tucked away in a corner at the extreme end of 
The Valley, half concealed by a projecting bastion 
of rock, lies the entrance to a very unostentatious 
tomb. It is easily overlooked and rarely visited, 
but it has a very special interest as being the first 
ever constructed in The Valley. More than that : it 

* 5 ° 







The Valley and the Tomb 


is notable as an experiment in a new theory of 
tomb design. To the Egyptian it was a matter of 
vital importance that his body should rest inviolate 
in the place constructed for it, and this the earlier 
kings had thought to ensure by erecting over it a very 
mountain of stone. It was also essential to a 
mummy’s well-being that it should be fully equipped 
against every need, and, in the case of a luxurious 
and display-loving Oriental monarch, this would 
naturally involve a lavish use of gold and other 
treasure. The result was obvious enough. The very 
magnificence of the monument was its undoing, and 
within a few generations at most the mummy would 
be disturbed and its treasure stolen. Various expedi- 
ents were tried ; the entrance passage — naturally 
the weak spot in a pyramid — was plugged with 
granite monoliths weighing many tons ; false passages 
were constructed ; secret doors were contrived ; every- 
thing that ingenuity could suggest or wealth could 
purchase was employed. Vain labour all of it, for by 
patience and perseverance the tomb robber in every 
case surmounted the difficulties that were set to 
bailie him. Moreover, the success of these expedients, 
and therefore the safety of the monument itself, was 
largely dependent on the good will of the mason 
who carried out the work, and the architect who de- 
signed it. Careless workmanship would leave a 
danger point in the best planned defences, and, in 
private tombs at any rate, we know that an ingress 
for plunderers was sometimes contrived by the officials 
who planned the work. 

Efforts to secure the guarding of the royal monu- 
ment were equally unavailing. A king might leave 
enormous endowments — as a matter of fact each 

5 1 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


king did — for the upkeep of large companies of 
pyramid officials and guardians, but after a time 
these very officials were ready enough to connive at 
the plundering of the monument they were paid to 
guard, while the endowments were sure, at the end 
of the dynasty at latest, to be diverted by some 
subsequent king to other purposes. At the begin- 
ning of the Eighteenth Dynasty there was hardly 
a king’s tomb in the whole of Egypt that had not 
been rifled — a somewhat grisly thought to the 
monarch who was choosing the site for his own last 
resting place. Thothmes I evidently found it so, 
and devoted a good deal of thought to the problem, 
and as a result we get the lonely little tomb at the 
head of The Valley. Secrecy was to be the solution 
to the problem. 

A preliminary step in this direction had been taken 
by his predecessor, Amen hetep I, who made his tomb 
some distance away from his funerary temple, on the 
summit of the Drah Abu’l Negga foot-hills, hidden 
beneath a stone, but this was carrying it a good 
deal further. It was a drastic break with tradition, 
and we may be sure that he hesitated long before he 
made the decision. In the first place his pride would 
suffer, for love of ostentation was ingrained in every 
Egyptian monarch and in his tomb more than any- 
where else he was accustomed to display it. Then, 
too, the new arrangement would seem likely to 
cause a certain amount of inconvenience to his 
mummy. The early funerary monuments had 
always, in immediate proximity to the actual place of 
burial, a temple in which the due ceremonies were 
performed at the various yearly festivals, and daily 
offerings were made. Now’ there was to be no monu- 

5 * 




The Valley and the Tomb 


ment over the tomb itself, and the funerary temple 
in which the offerings were made was to be situated a 
mile or so away, on the other side of the hill. It 
was certainly not a convenient arrangement, but it was 
necessary if the secrecy of the tomb was to be kept, 
and secrecy King Thothmes had decided on, as the 
one chance of escaping the fate of his predecessors. 

The construction of this hidden tomb was en- 
trusted by Thothmes to Ineni, his chief architect, 
and in the biography which was inscribed on the 
wall of his funerary chapel Ineni has put on record 
the secrecy with which the work was carried out. 
“ I superintended the excavation of the cliff tomb of 
His Majesty,” he tells us, “ alone, no one seeing, no 
one hearing.” Unfortunately he omits to tell us 
anything about the workmen he employed. It is 
sufficiently obvious that a hundred or more lab- 
ourers with a knowledge of the king’s dearest secret 
would never be allowed at large, and we can be 
quite sure that Ineni found some effectual means of 
stopping their mouths. Conceivably the work was 
carried out by prisoners of war, who were slaughtered 
at its completion. 

How long the secret of this particular tomb held 
we do not know. Probably not long, for what 
secret was ever kept in Egypt ? At the time of its 
discovery in 1899 little remained in it but the massive 
stone sarcophagus, and the king himself was moved, 
as we know, first of all to the tomb of his daughter 
Hat-shep-sut, and subsequently, with the other royal 
mummies, to Deir el Bahari. In any case, whether 
the hiding of the tomb was temporarily successful 
or not, a new fashion had been set, and the remain- 
ing kings of this Dynasty, together with those of 

S3 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh'Amen 


the Nineteenth and Twentieth, were all buried in 
The Valley. 

The idea of secrecy did not long prevail. From 
the nature of things it could not, and the later 
kings seem to have accepted the fact, and gone back 
to the old plan of making their tombs conspicuous. 
Now that it had become the established custom to 
place all the royal tombs within a very restricted 
area they may have thought that tomb-robbery was 
securely provided against, seeing that it was very 
much to the reigning king’s interest to see that the 
royal burial site was protected. If they did, they 
mightily deceived themselves. We know from in- 
ternal evidence that Tut-ankh Amen’s tomb was 
entered by robbers within ten, or at most fifteen, 
years of his death. We also know, from graffiti in 
the tomb of Thothmes IV, that that monarch too 
had suffered at the hands of plunderers within a 
very few years of his burial, for we find King 
Hor-em-heb in the eighth year of his reign issuing 
instructions to a certain high official named Maya 
to ki renew the burial of King Thothmes IV, justified, 
in the Precious Habitation in Western Thebes.” 
They must have been bold spirits who made the 
venture: they were evidently in a great hurry, and 
we have reason to believe that they were caught 
in the act. If so, we may be sure they died deaths 
that were lingering and ingenious. 

Strange sights The Valley must have seen, and 
desperate the ventures that took place in it. One 
can imagine the plotting for days beforehand, the 
secret rendezvous on the cliff by night, the bribing 
or drugging of the cemetery guards, and then the 
desperate burrowing in the dark, the scramble 

54 




The Valley and the Tomb 


through a small hole into the burial-chamber, the 
hectic search by a glimmering light for treasure 
that was portable, and the return home at dawn 
laden with booty. We can imagine these things, and 
at the same time we can realize how inevitable it all 
was. By providing his mummy with the elaborate 
and costly outfit which he thought essential to its 
dignity, the king was himself compassing its destruc- 
tion. The temptation was too great. Wealth beyond 
the dreams of avarice lay there at the disposal of 
whoever should find the means to reach it, and 
sooner or later the tomb-robber was bound to win 
through. 

For a few generations, under the powerful kings of 
the Eighteenth and Nineteenth Dynasties, The Valley 
tombs must have been reasonably secure. Plunder- 
ing on a big scale would be impossible without the 
connivance of the officials concerned. In the Twen- 
tieth Dynasty it was quite another story. There 
were weaklings on the throne, a fact of which the 
official classes, as ever, were quick to take advan- 
tage. Cemetery guardians became lax and venial, 
and a regular orgy of grave-robbing seems to have set 
in. This is a fact of which we have actual first-hand 
evidence, for there have come down to us, dating 
from the reign of Rameses IX, a series of papyri 
dealing with this very subject, with reports of 
investigations into charges of tomb-robbery, and 
accounts of the trial of the criminals concerned. 
They are extraordinarily interesting documents. We 
get from them, in addition to very valuable informa- 
tion about the tombs, something which Egyptian 
documents as a rule singularly lack, a story with a 
real human element in it, and we are enabled to see 

55 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


right into the minds of a group of officials who 
lived in Thebes three thousand years ago. 

The leading characters in the story are three, 
Khamwese, the vizier, or governor of the district, 
Peser, the mayor of that part of the city which lay 
on the east bank, and Pewero, the mayor of the 
western side, ex-officio guardian of the necropolis. The 
two latter were evidently, one might say naturally, 
on bad terms : each was jealous of the other. Con- 
sequently, Peser was not ill pleased to receive one 
day reports of tomb-plundering on an extensive scale 
that was going on on the western bank. Here was 
a chance to get his rival into trouble, so he has- 
tened to report the matter to the vizier, giving, 
somewhat foolishly, exact figures as to the tombs 
which had been entered — ten royal tombs, four tombs 
of the priestesses of Amen, and a long list of private 
tombs 

On the following day Khamwese sent a party of 
officials across the river to confer with Pewero, and 
to investigate the charges. The results of their 
investigations were as follows. Of the ten royal tombs, 
one was found to have been actually broken into, 
and attempts had been made on two of the others. 
Of the priestesses’ tombs, two were pillaged and two 
were intact. The private tombs had all been plun- 
dered. These facts were hailed by Pewero as a 
complete vindication of his administration, an opinion 
which the vizier apparently endorsed. The plunder- 
ing of the private tombs was cynically admitted, but 
what of that ? To people of our class what do the 
tombs of private individuals matter ? Of the four 
priestesses’ tombs two were plundered and two were 
not. Balance the one against the other, and what 

56 




The Valley and the Tomb 


cause has anyone to grumble? Of the ten royal 
tombs mentioned by Peser only one had actually been 
entered ; only one out of ten, so clearly his whole 
story was a tissue of lies ! Thus Pewero, on the 
principle, apparently, that if you are accused of 
ten murders and are only found guilty of one, you 
leave the court without a stain on your character. 

As a celebration of his triumph Pewero col- 
lected next day “ the inspectors, the necropolis 
administrators, the workmen, the police, and all the 
labourers of the necropolis ” and sent them as a 
body to the east side, with instructions to make a 
triumphant parade throughout the town generally, 
but particularly in the neighbourhood of Peser’s 
house. You may be sure they carried out this latter 
part of their instructions quite faithfully. Peser 
bore it as long as he could, but at last his feelings 
got too much for him, and in an altercation with 
one of the western officials he announced his in- 
tention, in front of witnesses, of reporting the whole 
matter to the king himself. This was a fatal error, 
of which his rival was quick to take advantage. In 
a letter to the vizier he accused the unfortunate 
Peser — first, of questioning the good faith of a com- 
mission appointed by his direct superior, and secondly, 
of going over the head of that superior, and stating 
his case directly to the king, a proceeding at which 
the virtuous Pewero threw up his hands in horror, 
as contrary to all custom and subversive of all dis- 
cipline. This was the end of Peser. The offended 
vizier summoned a court, a court in which the un- 
happy man, as a judge, was bound himself to sit, and 
in it he was tried for perjury and found guilty. 

That in brief is the story : it is told at full 

* 57 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh'Amen 


length in Vol. IV, par. 499 ff., of Breasted’s “ Ancient 
Records of Egypt.” It is tolerably clear from it that 
both the mayor and the vizier were themselves 
implicated in the robberies in question. The investi- 
gation they made was evidently a blind, for within 
a year or two of these proceedings we find other 
cases of tomb-robbing cropping up in the Court 
records, and at least one of the tombs in question 
occurs in Peser’s original list. 

The leading spirits in this company of cemetery 
thieves seem to have been a gang of eight men, 
five of whose names have come down to us — the 
stone-cutter Hapi, the artisan Iramen, the peasant 
Amen-em-heb, the water-carrier Kemwese, and the 
negro slave Ehenefer. They were eventually appre- 
hended on the charge of having desecrated the royal 
tomb referred to in the investigation, and we have 
a full account of their trial. It began, according 
to custom, by beating the prisoners “ with a 
double rod, smiting their feet and their hands,” to 
assist their memories. Under this stimulus they 
made full confession. The opening sentences in the 
confession are mutilated in the text, but they evi- 
dently describe how the thieves tunnelled through 
the rock to the burial chamber, and found the king 
and queen in their sarcophagi : “ We penetrated 
them all, we found her resting likewise.” The text 
goes on 

“ We opened their coffins, and their coverings in which 
they were. We found the august mummy of this king. 
. . . There was a numerous list of amulets and orna- 
ments of gold at its throat ; its head had a mask of gold 
upon it ; the august mummy of this king was overlaid 
with gold throughout. Its coverings were wrought with 

58 







The Valley and the Tomb 


gold and silver, within and without ; inlaid with every 
costly stone. We stripped off the gold, which we found on 
the august mummy of this god, and its amulets and orna- 
ments which were at its throat, and the covering wherein 
it rested. We found the king’s wife likewise ; we stripped 
off all that we found on her likewise. We set fire to their 
coverings. We stole their furniture, which we found with 
them, being vases of gold, silver, and bronze. We divided, and 
made the gold which we found on these two gods, on their 
mummies, and the amulets, ornaments and coverings, into 
eight parts.” 1 

On this confession they were found guilty, and 
removed to the house of detention, until such time as 
the king himself might determine their punishment. 

In spite of this trial and a number of others of 
a similar character, matters in The Valley went 
rapidly from [bad to worse. The tombs of Amen- 
hetep III, Seti I, and Rameses II, are mentioned 
in the Court records as having been broken into, 
and in the following Dynasty all attempts at 
guarding the tombs seem to have been abandoned, 
and we find the royal mummies being moved about 
from sepulchre to sepulchre in a desperate effort 
to preserve them. Rameses III, for instance, was 
disturbed and re-buried three times at least in this 
Dynasty, and other kings known to have been trans- 
ferred include Ahmes, Amen hetep I, Thothmes II, 
and even Rameses the Great himself. In this last case 
the docket states : — 

“ Year 17, third month of the second season, day 6, day 
of bringing Osiris, King Usermare-Setepnere (Rameses II), 
to bury him again, in the tomb of Osiris, King Men-ma'Re- 
Seti (I) : by the High Priest of Amen, Paynezem.” 

1 Breasted, Ancient Records of Egypt, Vol. TV, par. 538. 

59 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


A reign or two later we find Seti I and Raineses II 
being moved from this tomb and re-buried in the 
tomb of Queen Inhapi ; and in the same reign we get 
a reference to the tomb we have been using as our 
laboratory this year : — 

“ Day of bringing King Men-pehti-Re (Rameses I) out 
from the tomb of King Men-ma-Re-Seti (II), in order to 
bring him into the tomb of Inhapi, which is in the Great 
Place, wherein King Amen-hetep rests.” 

No fewer than thirteen of the royal mummies found 
their way at one time or another to the tomb of 
Amen-hetep II, and here they were allowed to remain. 
The other kings were eventually collected from their 
various hiding places, taken out of The Valley alto- 
gether, and placed in a well-hidden tomb cut in the 
Deir el Bahari cliff. This was the final move, for by 
some accident the exact locality of the tomb was 
lost, and the mummies remained in peace for nearly 
three thousand years. 

Throughout all these troublous times in the 
Twentieth and Twenty-first Dynasties there is no 
mention of Tut-ankh-Amen and his tomb. He had 
not escaped altogether — his tomb, as we have already 
noted, having been entered within a very few years 
of his death — but he was lucky enough to escape 
the ruthless plundering of the later period. For some 
reason his tomb had been overlooked. It was situ- 
ated in a very low-lying part of The Valley, and a 
heavy rain storm might well have washed away all 
trace of its entrance. Or again, it may owe its safety 
to the fact that a number of huts, for the use of 
workmen who were employed in excavating the tomb 
of a later king, were built immediately above it. 

60 




The Valley and the Tomb 


With the passing of the mummies the history 
of The Valley, as known to us from ancient Egyp- 
tian sources, comes to an end. Five hundred years 
had passed since Thothmes I had constructed his 
modest little tomb there, and, surely in the whole 
world’s history, there is no small plot of ground 
that had five hundred years of more romantic 
story to record. From now on we are to imagine 
a deserted valley, spirit-haunted doubtless to the 
Egyptian, its cavernous galleries plundered and 
empty, the entrances of many of them open, to 
become the home of fox, desert owl, or colonies 
of bats. Yet, plundered, deserted and desolate as 
were its tombs, the romance of it was not yet 
wholly gone. It still remained the sacred Valley 
of the Kings, and crowds of the sentimental and 
the curious must still have gone to visit it. Some 
of its tombs, indeed, were actually re-used in the 
time of Osorkon I (about 900 b.c.) for the burial 
of priestesses. 

References to its rock-hewn passages are numer- 
ous in classical authors, and that many of them were 
still accessible to visitors in their day is evident from 
the reprehensible manner in which, like John Smith, 
1878, they carved their names upon the walls. A 
certain Philetairos, son of Ammonios, who inscribed 
his name in several places on the walls of the tomb 
in which we had our lunch, intrigued me not a 
little during the winter, though perhaps it would 
have been better not to mention the fact, lest I 
seem to countenance the beastly habits of the John 
Smiths. 

One final picture, before the mist of the Middle 
Ages settles down upon The Valley, and hides it 

61 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


from our view. There is something about the atmo- 
sphere of Egypt — most people experience it I think 
— that attunes one’s mind to solitude, and that is 
probably one of the reasons why, after the con- 
version of the country to Christianity, so many of its 
inhabitants turned with enthusiasm to the hermit’s 
life. The country itself, with its equable climate, 
its narrow strip of cultivable land, and its desert 
hills on either side, honeycombed with natural and 
artificial caverns, was well adapted to such a pur- 
pose. Shelter and seclusion were readily obtainable, 
and that within easy reach of the outer world, and 
the ordinary means of subsistence. In the early 
centuries of the Christian era there must have been 
thousands who forsook the world and adopted the 
contemplative life, and in the rock-cut sepulchres 
upon the desert hills we find their traces every- 
where. Such an ideal spot as The Valley^of the 
Kings could hardly pass unnoticed, and in the 
II— IV centuries a.d. we find a colony of anchor- 
ites in full possession, the open tombs in use as cells, 
and one transformed into a church. 

This, then, is our final glimpse of The Valley in 
ancient times, and a strange incongruous picture it 
presents. Magnificence and royal pride have been 
replaced by humble poverty. The “ precious habita- 
tion ” of the king has narrowed to a hermit’s cell. 


6a 




CHAPTER III 

The Valley in Modern Times 

F OR our first real description of The Valley in 
modern times we must turn to the pages of 
Richard Pococke, an English traveller who 
in 1743 published 44 A Description of the East ’ in 
several volumes. His account is extremely interest- 
ing, and, considering the hurried nature of his visit, 
extraordinarily accurate. Here is his description of 
the approach to The Valley : — 

44 The Sheik furnished me with horses, and we set out 
to go to Biban-el-Meluke, and went about a mile to the 
north, in a sort of street, on each side of which the rocky 
ground about ten feet high has rooms cut into it, some of 
them being supported with pillars; and, as there is not 
the least sign in the plain of private buildings, I thought 
that these in the very earliest times might serve as houses, 
and be the first invention after tents, and contrived as 
better shelter from wind, and cold of the nights. It is a 
sort of gravelly stone, and the doors are cut regularly to 
the street . 1 We then turned to the north west, enter’d 
in between the high rocky hills, and went in a very 
narrow valley. We after turn’d towards the south, and 
then to the north west, going in all between the mountains 
about a mile or a mile and a half. . . . We came to a 
part that is wider, being a round opening like an amphi- 
theatre and ascended by a narrow step passage about ten feet 
high, which seems to have been broken down thro’ the rock, 

1 They certainly have the appearance of houses, but actually they 
are facade tombs of the Middle Kingdom. 

63 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh^Amen 


the antient passage being probably from the Memnonium 
under the hills, and it may be from the grottos I enter’d 
on the other side. By this passage we came to Biban-el- 
Meluke, or Bab-el-Meluke, that is, the gate or court of the 
kings, being the sepulchres of the Kings of Thebes.” i 

The tradition of a secret passage through the hills to 
the Deir el Bahari side of the cliff is still to be found 
among the natives, and to the present day there are 
archaeologists who subscribe to it. There is, however, 
little or no basis for the theory, and certainly not 
a vestige of proof. 

Pococke then goes on to an account of such of 
the tombs as were accessible at the time of his 
visit. He mentions fourteen in all, and most of 
them are recognizable from his description. Of five 
of them, those of Rameses IV. Rameses VI, Rameses 
XII, Seti II, and the tomb commenced by Tausert 
and finished by Set-nekht, he gives the entire plan. 
In the case of four — Mer-en-Ptah, Rameses III, 
Amen-meses and Rameses XI — he only planned the 
outer galleries and chambers, the inner chambers 
evidently being inaccessible ; and the remaining five 
he speaks of as “ stopped up.” 2 It is evident from 
Pococke’s narrative that he was not able to devote 
as much time to his visit as he would have liked. 
The Valley was not a safe spot to linger in, for the 
pious anchorite we left in possession had given 
place to a horde of bandits, who dwelt among the 
Kurna hills, and terrorized the whole country-side. 
“ The Sheik also was in haste to go,” he remarks, 
“ being afraid, as I imagine, lest the people should 

1 Pococke, A Description of the East , Vol. I., p. 97. 

* From the evidence of graffiti these same tombs were open in classical 
times. The Greek authors refer to them as fftipiyyes (syringes), from 
their reed-like form. 


64 






The Valley in Modem Times 


have opportunity to gather together if we staid out 
long.” 

These Theban bandits were notorious, and we find 
frequent mention of them in the tales of eighteenth 
century travellers. Norden, who visited Thebes in 
1737, but who never got nearer The Valley than 
the Ramasseum — he seems to have thought himself 
lucky to have got so far — describes them thus :* 

“ These people occupy, at present, the grottos, which 
are seen in great numbers in the neighbouring mountains. 
They obey no one ; they are lodged so high, that they 
discover at a distance if anyone comes to attack them. 
Then, if they think themselves strong enough, they descend 
into the plain, to dispute the ground ; if not, they keep 
themselves under shelter in their grottos, or they retire 
deeper into the mountains, whither you would have no 
great desire to follow them.” 1 

Bruce, who visited The Valley in 1769, also 
suffered at the hands of these bandits, and puts on 
record a somewhat drastic, but fruitless, attempt, 
made by one of the native governors, to curb their 
activities : — 

“ A number of robbers, who much resemble our gypsies, 
live in the holes of the mountains above Thebes. They 
are all outlaws, punished with death if elsewhere found. 
Osman Bey, an ancient governor of Girge, unable to suffer 
any longer the disorders committed by these people, 
ordered a quantity of dried faggots to be brought together, 
and, with his soldiers, took possession of the face of the 
mountain, where the greatest number of these wretches 
were : he then ordered all their caves to be filled with 
this dry brushwood, to which he set fire, sc that most of 


1 Norden, Travels in Egypt and Nubia , translated by Dr. Peter Temple- 
man. London, 1757. 

*>5 


The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


them were destroyed ; but they have since recruited their 
numbers without changing their manners.” 1 

In the course of this visit Bruce made copies of 
the figures of harpers in the tomb of Rameses III, 
a tomb which still goes by his name, but his labours 
were brought to an abrupt conclusion. Finding 
that it was his intention to spend the night in the 
tomb, and continue his researches in the morning, 
his guides were seized with terror, “ With great 
clamour and marks of discontent, they dashed their 
torches against the largest harp, and made the 
best of their way out of the cave, leaving me and 
my people in the dark ; and all the way as they 
went, they made dreadful denunciations of tragical 
events that were immediately to follow, upon their 
departure from the cave.” That their terror was 
genuine and not ill-founded, Bruce was soon to 
discover, for as he rode down The Valley in the 
gathering darkness, he was attacked by a party 
of the bandits, who lay in wait for him, and hurled 
stones at him from the side of the cliff. With the 
aid of his gun and his servant’s blunderbuss he 
managed to beat them off, but, on arriving at his 
boat, he thought it prudent to cast off at once, and 
made no attempt to repeat his visit. 

Nor did even the magic of Napoleon’s name suffice 
to curb the arrogance of these Theban bandits, for the 
members of his scientific commission who visited 
Thebes in the last days of the century were molested, 
and even fired upon. They succeeded, however, in 
making a complete survey of all the tombs then open, 
and also carried out a small amount of excavation. 

Let us pass on now to 1815, and make the ac- 

1 Bruce, Travels to Discover the Source of the Nile, Vol. I, p. 125. 

66 




The Valley in Modem Times 


quaintance of one of the most remarkable men in the 
whole history of Egyptology. In the early years of 
the century, a young Italian giant, Belzoni by name, 
was earning a precarious income in England by per- 
forming feats of strength at fairs and circuses. Born 
in Padua, of a respectable family of Roman extraction, 
he had been intended for the priesthood, but a 
roving disposition, combined with the internal troubles 
in Italy at that period, had driven him to seek his 
fortune abroad. We happened recently upon a refer- 
ence to him in his pre-Egyptian days, in one of 
“ Rainy Day ” Smith’s books of reminiscences, where 
the author describes how he was carried round the 
stage, with a group of other people, by the “strong 
man” Belzoni. In the intervals of circus work Bel- 
zoni seems to have studied engineering, and in 1815 
he thought he saw a chance of making his fortune 
by introducing into Egypt a hydraulic wheel, which 
would, he claimed, do four times the work of the 
ordinary native appliance. With this in view, he 
made his way to Egypt, contrived an introduction to 
Mohammed Ali the “ Bashaw,” and in the garden 
of the palace actually set up his wheel. According 
to Belzoni it was a great success, but the Egyptians 
refused to have anything to do with it, and he found 
himself stranded in Egypt. 

Then, through the traveller Burchardt, he got 
an introduction to Salt, the British Consul-General 
in Egypt, and contracted with him to bring the 
“colossal Memnion bust” (Rameses II, now in the 
British Museum) from Luxor to Alexandria. This 
was in 1815, and the next five years he spent in 
Egypt, excavating and collecting antiquities, first for 
Salt, and afterwards on his own account, and quarrel- 

67 , 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


ling with rival excavators, notably Drovetti, who 
represented the French Consul. Those were the great 
days of excavating. Anything to which a fancy was 
taken, from a scarab to an obelisk, was just appro- 
priated, and if there was a difference of opinion with 
a brother excavator one laid for him with a gun. 

Belzoni’s account of his experiences in Egypt, 
published in 1820, is one of the most fascinating 
books in the whole of Egyptian literature, and I 
should like to quote from it at length — how, for in- 
stance, he dropped an obelisk in the Nile and fished it 
out again, and the full story of his various squabbles. 
We must confine ourselves, however, to his actual 
work in The Valley. Here he discovered and cleared 
a number of tombs, including those of Ay, Mentu* 
her-khepesh-ef, Rameses I, and Seti I. In the last 
named he found the magnificent alabaster sarcoph- 
agus which is now in the Soane Museum in London. 

This was the first occasion on which excavations 
on a large scale had ever been made in The Valley, and 
we must give Belzoni full credit for the manner in which 
they were carried out. There are episodes which give 
the modern excavator rather a shock, as, for example, 
when he describes his method of dealing with sealed 
doorways — by means of a battering ram — but on the 
whole the work was extraordinarily good. It is 
perhaps worth recording the fact that Belzoni, like 
everyone else who has ever dug in The Valley, was of 
the opinion that he had absolutely exhausted its 
possibilities. “ It is my firm opinion,” he states, “ that 
in the Valley of Beban el Malook, there are no more 
(tombs) than are now known, in consequence of my late 
discoveries ; for, previously to my quitting that place, 
I exerted all my humble abilities in endeavouring to 

68 








The Valley in Modem Times 


find another tomb, but could not succeed ; and what 
is a still greater proof, independent of my own re- 
searches, after I quitted the place, Mr. Salt, the British 
Consul, resided there four months and laboured in like 
manner in vain to find another.” 

In 1820 Belzoni returned to England, and gave 
an exhibition of his treasures, including the alabaster 
sarcophagus and a model of the tomb of Seti, in a 
building which had been erected in Piccadilly in 1812, 
a building which many of us can still remember — the 
Egyptian Hall. He never returned to Egypt, but died 
a few years later on an expedition to Timbuctoo. 

For twenty years after Belzoni’s day The Valley 
was well exploited, and published records come thick 
and fast. We shall not have space here to do more 
than mention a few of the names — Salt, Champollion, 
Burton, Hay, Head, Rosellini, Wilkinson, who num- 
bered the tombs, Rawlinson, Rhind. In 1844 the 
great German expedition under Lepsius made a 
complete survey of The Valley, and cleared the tomb 
of Rameses II, and part of the tomb of Mer-en-Ptah. 
Hereafter comes a gap; the German expedition was 
supposed to have exhausted the possibilities, and 
nothing more of any consequence was done in The 
Valley until the very end of the century. 

In this period, however, just outside The Valley, 
there occurred one of the most important events 
in the whole of its history. In the preceding chap- 
ter we told how the various royal mummies were 
collected from their hiding-places, and deposited 
all together in a rock cleft at Deir el Bahari. 
There for nearly three thousand years they had 
rested, and there, in the summer of 1875, they 
were found by the members of a Kurna family, 

69 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


the Abd-el-Rasuls. It was in the thirteenth cen- 
tury b.c. that the inhabitants of this village first 
adopted the trade of tomb-robbing, and it is a 
trade that they have adhered to steadfastly ever 
since. Their activities are curbed at the present 
day, but they still search on the sly in out-of-the- 
way comers, and occasionally make a rich strike. 
On this occasion the find was too big to handle. 
It was obviously impossible to clear the tomb of 
its contents, so the whole family was sworn to 
secrecy, and its heads determined to leave the find 
where it was, and to draw on it from time to time 
as they needed money. Incredible as it may seem 
the secret was kept for six years, and the family, with 
a banking account of forty or more dead Pharaohs 
to draw upon, grew rich. 

It soon became manifest, from objects which 
came into the market, that there had been a rich 
find of royal material somewhere, but it was not 
until 1881 that it was possible to trace the sale of 
the objects to the Abd-el-Rasul family. Even then 
it was difficult to prove anything. The head of the 
family was arrested and subjected by the Mudir of 
Keneh, the notorious Daoud Pasha, whose methods 
of administering justice were unorthodox but effectual, 
to an examination. Naturally he denied the charge, 
and equally naturally the village of Kurna rose as 
one man and protested that in a strictly honest com- 
munity the Abd-el-Rasul family were of all men 
the most honest. He was released provisionally for 
lack of evidence, but his interview with Daoud seems 
to have shaken him. Interviews with Daoud usually 
did have that effect. 

One of our older workmen told us once of an 

70 




The Valley in Modem Times 


experience of his in his younger days. He had 
been by trade a thief, and in the exercise of his 
calling had been apprehended and brought before the 
Mudir. It was a hot day, and his nerves were shaken 
right at the start by finding the Mudir taking his 
ease in a large earthenware jar of water. From this 
unconventional seat of justice Daoud had looked 
at him — just looked at him — •“ and as his eyes went 
through me I felt my bones turning to water within 
me. Then very quietly he said to me, ‘ This is the 
first time you have appeared before me. You are 
dismissed, but — be very, very careful that you do 
not appear a second time,’ and I was so terrified 
that I changed my trade and never did.” 

Some effect of this sort must have been produced 
on the Abd-el-Rasul family, for a month later one 
of its members went to the Mudir and made full 
confession. News was telegraphed at once to Cairo, 
Emile Brugsch Bey of the Museum was sent up to 
investigate and take charge, and on the 5th of July, 
1881, the long-kept secret was revealed to him. It 
must have been an amazing experience. There, 
huddled together in a shallow, ill-cut grave, lay the 
most powerful monarchs of the ancient East, kings 
whose names were familiar to the whole world, but 
whom no one in their wildest moments had ever 
dreamt of seeing. There they had remained, where 
the priests in secrecy had hurriedly brought them 
that dark night three thousand years ago ; and 
on their coffins and mummies, neatly docketed, were 
the records of their journeyings from one hiding-place 
to another. Some had been re-wrapped, and two or 
three in the course of their many wanderings had con- 
trived to change their coffins. In forty-eight hours 

7i 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


— we don’t do things quite so hastily nowadays — the 
tomb was cleared ; the kings were embarked upon 
the Museum barge ; and within fifteen days of 
Brugsch Bey’s arrival in Luxor, they were landed in 
Cairo and were deposited in the Museum. 

It is a familiar story, but worth repeating, that as 
the barge made its way down the river the men of 
the neighbouring villages fired guns as for a funeral, 
while the women followed along the bank, tearing 
their hair, and uttering that shrill quavering cry of 
mourning for the dead, a cry that has doubtless 
come right down from the days of the Pharaohs 
themselves. 

To return to The Valley. In 1898, acting on 
information supplied by local officials, M. Loret, 
then Director General of the Service of Antiquities, 
opened up several new royal tombs, including those 
of Thothmes I, Thothmes III, and Amen-hetep II 
This last was a very important discovery. VVe have 
already stated that in the Twenty-first Dynasty 
thirteen royal mummies had found sanctuary in this 
Amen-hetep’s tomb, and here in 1898 the thirteen were 
found. It was but their mummies that remained. 
The wealth, which in their power they had lavished 
on their funerals, had long since vanished, but at 
least they had been spared the last indignity. The 
tomb had been entered, it is true ; it had been 
robbed, and the greater part of the funeral equip- 
ment had been plundered and broken, but it had 
escaped the wholesale destruction that the other 
royal tombs had undergone, and the mummies re- 
mained intact. The body of Amen-hetep himself 
still lay within its own sarcophagus, where it had 
rested for more than three thousand years. Very 

73 





Plate VII 

INTERIOR OF THE TOMB OF RAMESES IV, SHOWING THE SARCOPHAGI 





The Valley in Modem Times 


rightly the Government, at the representation of Sir 
William Garstin, decided against its removal. The 
tomb was barred and bolted, a guard was placed 
upon it, and there the king was left in peace. 

Unfortunately there is a sequel to this story. 
Within a year or two of the discovery the tomb 
was broken into by a party of modem tomb- 
robbers, doubtless with the connivance of the guard, 
and the mummy was removed from its sarcophagus 
and searched for treasure. The thieves were sub- 
sequently tracked down by the Chief Inspector of 
Antiquities, and arrested, although he was unable 
to secure their conviction at the hands of the 
Native Court. The whole proceedings, as set forth 
in the official report, remind one very forcibly of 
the records of ancient tomb-robbery described in the 
preceding chapter, and we are forced to the con- 
clusion that in many ways the Egyptian of the 
present day differs little from his ancestor in the 
reign of Rameses IX. 

One moral we can draw from this episode, and 
we commend it to the critics who call us Vandals 
for taking objects from the tombs. By removing 
antiquities to museums we are really assuring their 
safety : left in situ they would inevitably, sooner 
or later, become the prey of thieves, and that, 
for all practical purposes, would be the end of 
them. 

In 1902 permission to dig in The Valley under 
Government supervision was granted to an Ameri- 
can, Mr. Theodore Davis, and he subsequently 
excavated there for twelve consecutive seasons. His 
principal finds are known to most of us. They 
include the tombs of Thothmes IV, Hat-shep-sut, 

6 73 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


Si-Ptah, Yua and Thua — great-grandfather and grand- 
mother these of Tut-ankh-Amen’s queen — Hor-em-heb, 
and a vault, not a real tomb, devised for the transfer 
of the burial of Akh-en-Aten from its original tomb at 
Tell el Amarna. This cache comprised the mummy 
and coffin of the heretic king, a very small part of 
his funerary equipment, and portions of the sepul- 
chral shrine of his mother Tyi. In 1914 Mr. Davis’s 
concession reverted to us, and the story of the tomb 
of Tut-ankh-Amen really begins. 


74 




CHAPTER IV 

Oue Prefatory Work at Thebes 

E VER since my first visit to Egypt in 1890 
it had been my ambition to dig in The 
Valley, and when, at the invitation of Sir 
William Garstin and Sir Gaston Maspero, I began 
to excavate for Lord Carnarvon in 1907, it was our 
joint hope that eventually we might be able to 
get a concession there. I had, as a matter of fact, 
when Inspector of the Antiquities Department, found, 
and superintended the clearing of, two tombs in 
The Valley for Mr. Theodore Davis, and this had 
made me the more anxious to work there under a 
regular concession. For the moment it was impos- 
sible, and for seven years we dug with varying for- 
tune in other parts of the Theban necropolis. 
The results of the first five of these years have 
been published in “ Five Years’ Explorations at 
Thebes,” a joint volume brought out by Lord Car- 
narvon and myself in 1912. 

In 1914 our discovery of the tomb of Amen- 
hetep I, on the summit of the Drah abu’l Negga 
foothills, once more turned our attention Valley- 
wards, and we awaited our chance with some im- 
patience. Mr. Theodore Davis, who still held the 
concession, had already published the fact that he 
considered The Valley exhausted, and that there 
were no more tombs to be found, a statement cor- 
roborated by the fact that in his last two seasons 

75 



The Tomb of Tut ankh-Amen 


he did very little work in The Valley proper, but 
spent most of his time excavating in the approach 
thereto, in the neighbouring north valley, where he 
hoped to find the tombs of the priest kings and of 
the Eighteenth Dynasty queens, and in the mounds 
surrounding the Temple of Medinet Habu. Never- 
theless he was loath to give up the site, and it was 
not until June, 1914, that we actually received the 
long-coveted concession. Sir Gaston Maspero, Director 
of the Antiquities Department, who signed our con- 
cession, agreed with Mr. Davis that the site was 
exhausted, and told us frankly that he did not 
consider that it would repay further investigation. 
We remembered, however, that nearly a hundred 
years earlier Belzoni had made a similar claim, and 
refused to be convinced. We had made a thorough 
investigation of the site, and were quite sure that 
there were areas, covered by the dumps of pre- 
vious excavators, which had never been properly 
examined. 

Clearly enough we saw that very heavy work 
lay before us, and that many thousands of tons of 
surface debris would have to be removed before we 
could hope to find anything ; but there was always 
the chance that a tomb might reward us in the 
end, and, even if there was nothing else to go upon, 
it was a chance that we were quite willing to take. 
As a matter of fact we had something more, and, 
at the risk of being accused of post actum prescience, 
I will state that we had definite hopes of finding 
the tomb of one particular king, and that king 
Tut-ankh - Amen. 

To explain the reasons for this belief of ours 
we must turn to the published pages of Mr. Davis’s 

76 




Our Prefatory Work at Thebes 


excavations. Towards the end of his work in The 
Valley he had found, hidden under a rock, a faience 
cup which ^bore the name of Tut-ankh-Amen. In 
the same region he came upon a small pit-tomb, in 
which were found an unnamed alabaster statuette, 
possibly of Ay,£and a broken wooden box, in which 
were fragments of gold foil, bearing the figures 
and names of Tut-ankh-Amen and his queen. On 
the basis of these fragments of gold he claimed that 
he had actually found the burial place of Tut-ankh- 
Amen. The theory was quite untenable, for the pit- 
tomb in question was small and insignificant, of a 
type that might very well belong to a member of 
the royal household in the Ramesside period, but 
ludicrously inadequate for a king’s burial in the 
Eighteenth Dynasty. Obviously, the royal material 
found in it had been placed there at some later 
period, and had nothing to do with the tomb itself. 

Some little distance eastward from this tomb, 
he had also found in one of his earlier years of 
work (1907-8), buried in an irregular hole cut in 
the side of the rock, a cache of large pottery jars, 
with sealed mouths, and hieratic inscriptions upon 
their shoulders. A cursory examination was made 
of their contents, and as these seemed to consist 
merely of broken pottery, bundles of linen, and 
other oddments, Mr. Davis refused to be interested 
in them, and they were laid aside and stacked away 
in the store-room of his Valley house. There, some 
while afterwards, Mr. Winlock noticed them, and 
immediately realized their importance. With Mr. 
Davis’s consent the entire collection of jars was 
packed and sent to the Metropolitan Museum of 
Art, New York, and there Mr. Winlock made a 

77 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


thorough examination of their contents. Extra- 
ordinarily interesting they proved to be. There 
were clay seals, some bearing the name of Tut* 
ankh-Amen and others the impression of the 
royal necropolis seal, fragments of magnificent 
painted pottery vases, linen head-shawls — one in- 
scribed with the latest known date of Tut-ankh- 
Amen’s reign — floral collars, of the kind repre- 
sented as worn by mourners in burial scenes, and 
a mass of other miscellaneous objects ; the whole 
representing, apparently, the material which had 
been used during the funeral ceremonies of Tut- 
ankh ’Amen, and afterwards gathered together and 
stacked away within the jars. 

We had thus three distinct pieces of evidence — 
the faience cup found beneath the rock, the gold 
foil from the small pit-tomb, and this important 
cache of funerary material — which seemed definitely 
to connect Tut-ankh-Amen with this particular part 
of The Valley. To these must be added a fourth. 
It was in the near vicinity of these other finds that 
Mr. Davis had discovered the famous Akh-en-Aten 
cache. This contained the funerary remains of heretic 
royalties, brought hurriedly from Tell el Amarna and 
hidden here for safety, and that it was Tut-ankh-Amen 
himself who was responsible for their removal and 
reburial we can be reasonably sure from the fact 
that a number of his clay seals were found. 

With all this evidence before us we were thoroughly 
convinced in our own minds that the tomb of Tut- 
ankh-Amen was still to find, and that it ought to be 
situated not far from the centre of The Valley. In 
any case, whether we found Tut-ankh-Amen or not, 
we felt that a systematic and exhaustive search of 

78 




Our Prefatory Work at Thebes 


the inner valley presented reasonable chances of suc- 
cess, and we were in the act of completing our plans 
for an elaborate campaign in the season of 1914-15 
when war broke out, and for the time being all our 
plans had to be left in abeyance. 

War- work claimed most of my time for the next few 
years, but there were occasional intervals in which I 
was able to carry out small pieces of excavation. In 
February, 1915, for example, I made a complete 
clearance of the interior of the tomb of Amen-hetep 
III, partially excavated in 1799 by M. Devilliers, 
one of the members of Napoleon’s “ Commission 
d’ligypte,” and re-excavated later by Mr. Theodore 
Davis. In the course of this work we made the 
interesting discovery, from the evidence of intact 
foundation-deposits outside the entrance, and from 
other material found within the tomb, that it had 
been originally designed by Thothmes IV, and that 
Queen Tyi had actually been buried there. 

The following year, while on a short holiday at 
Luxor, I found myself involved quite unexpectedly 
in another piece of work. The absence of officials 
owing to the war, to say nothing of the general 
demoralization caused by the war itself, had natur- 
ally created a great revival of activity on the part 
of the local native tomb-robbers, and prospecting 
parties were out in all directions. News came into 
the village one afternoon that a find had been made 
in a lonely and unfrequented region on the western 
side of the mountain above The Valley of the Kings. 
Immediately a rival party of diggers armed them- 
selves and made their way to the spot, and in the 
lively engagement that ensued the original party 
were beaten and driven off, vowing vengeance. 

79 




The Tomb of Tut ankh-Amen 


To avert further trouble the notables of the 
village came to me and asked me to take action. 
It was already late in the afternoon, so I hastily 
collected the few of my workmen who had escaped 
the Army Labour Levies, and with the necessary 
materials set out for the scene of action, an ex- 
pedition involving a climb of more than 1,800 feet 
over the Kurna hills by moonlight. It was mid- 
night when we arrived on the scene, and the guide 
pointed out to me the end of a rope which dangled 
sheer down the face of a cliff. Listening, we could 
hear the robbers actually at work, so I first severed 
their rope, thereby cutting off their means of escape, 
and then, making secure a good stout rope of my 
own, I lowered myself down the cliff. Shinning 
down a rope at midnight, into a nestful of industrious 
tomb-robbers, is a pastime which at least does not 
lack excitement. There were eight at work, and 
when I reached the bottom there was an awkward 
moment or two. I gave them the alternative of 
clearing out by means of my rope, or else of stay- 
ing where they were without a rope at all, and 
eventually they saw reason and departed. The rest of 
the night I spent on the spot, and, as soon as it 
was light enough, climbed down into the tomb again 
to make a thorough investigation. 

The tomb was in a most remarkable situation 
(Plate VIII). Its entrance was contrived in the 
bottom of a natural water-worn cleft, 180 feet from 
the top of the cliff, and 220 feet above the valley bed, 
and so cunningly concealed that neither from the top 
nor the bottom could the slightest trace of it be 
seen. From the entrance a lateral passage ran straight 
into the face of the cliff, a distance of some 55 feet, 

8o 





Plate VIII 


VIEW SHOWING POSITION OF HAT ■ SHEP • SUT’S CLEFT-TOMB. 




Our Prefatory Work at Thebes 


after which it turned at right angles, and a short 
passage, cut on a sharp slope, led down into a chamber 
about 18 feet square. The whole place was full of 
rubbish from top to bottom, and through this rubbish 
the robbers had burrowed a tunnel over 90 feet long, 
just big enough for a man to crawl through. 

It was an interesting discovery, and might turn 
out to be very important, so I determined to make 
a complete clearance. Twenty days it took, working 
night and day with relays of workmen, and an extra- 
ordinarily difficult job it proved. The method of 
gaining access to the tomb by means of a rope from 
the top was unsatisfactory, for it was not a very 
safe proceeding at best, and it necessitated, more- 
over, a stiff climb from the valley. Obviously 
means of access from the valley-bottom would 
be preferable, and this we contrived by erecting 
sheers at the entrance to the tomb, so that by a 
running tackle we could pull ourselves up or let 
ourselves down. It was not a very comfortable 
operation even then, and I personally always made 
the descent in a net. 

Excitement among the workmen ruled high as 
the work progressed, for surely a place so well con- 
cealed must contain a wonderful treasure, and great 
was their disappointment when it proved that the 
tomb had neither been finished nor occupied. 
The only thing of value it contained was a large 
sarcophagus of crystalline sandstone, like the tomb, 
unfinished, with inscriptions which showed it to 
have been intended for Queen Hat-shep-sut. Pre- 
sumably this masterful lady had had the tomb 
constructed for herself as wife of King Thothmes II. 
Later, when she seized the throne and ruled actually 

81 



The Tomb of Tut-ankhAmen 


as a king, it was clearly necessary for her to have 
her tomb in The Valley like all the other kings — 
as a matter of fact I found it there myself in 1903 
—and the present tomb was abandoned. She would 
lave been better advised to hold to her original 
plan. In this secret spot her mummy would have 
lad a reasonable chance of avoiding disturbance : 
n The Valley it had none. A king she would be, 
md a king’s fate she shared. 

In the autumn of 1917 our real campaign in The 
Galley opened. The difficulty was to know where 
,o begin, for mountains of rubbish thrown out by 
irevious excavators encumbered the ground in all 
lirections, and no sort of record had ever been kept 
is to which areas had been properly excavated and 
vhich had not. Clearly the only satisfactory thing 
o do was to dig systematically right down to bed- 
ock, and I suggested to Lord Carnarvon that we 
ake as a starting-point the triangle of ground defined 
>y the tombs of Rameses II, Mer en-Ptah, and 
lameses VI, the area in which we hoped the tomb 
if Tut-ankh-Amen might be situated. 

It was rather a desperate undertaking, the site 
ieing piled high with enormous heaps of thrown- 
ut rubbish, but I had reason to believe that the 
round beneath had never been touched, and a strong 
onviction that we should find a tomb there. In 
tie course of the season’s work we cleared a con- 
iderable part of the upper layers of this area, and 
dvanced our excavations right up to the foot of 
ic tomb of Rameses VI. Here we came on a series 
f workmen’s huts ( see Plate X), built over masses of 
int boulders, the latter usually indicating in The 
alley the near proximity of a tomb. Our natural 

82 





Plate IX 

REMOVING SURFACE DEBRIS IN SEARCH OF THE TOMB OF TUT ANK.H AMEN. 




Our Prefatory Work at Thebes 


impulse was to enlarge our clearing in this direction, 
but by doing this we should have cut off all access 
to the tomb of Rameses above, to visitors one of 
the most popular tombs in the whole Valley. We 
determined to await a more convenient opportunity. 
So far the only results from our work were some 
ostraca , 1 interesting but not exciting. 

We resumed our work in this region in the season 
of 1919-20. Our first need was to break fresh ground 
for a dump, and in the course of this preliminary 
work we lighted on some small deposits of Rameses 
IV, near the entrance to his tomb. The idea this 
year was to clear the whole of the remaining part 
of the triangle already mentioned, so we started in 
with a fairly large gang of workmen. By the time 
Lord and Lady Carnarvon arrived in March the whole 
of the top debris had been removed, and we were 
ready to clear down into what we believed to be 
virgin ground below. We soon had proof that we 
were right, for we presently came upon a small cache 
containing thirteen alabaster jars, bearing the names 
of Rameses II and Mer-en-Ptah, probably from the 
tomb of the latter. As this was the nearest approach 
to a real find that we had yet made in The Valley, 
we were naturally somewhat excited, and Lady 
Carnarvon, I remember, insisted on digging out these 
jars — beautiful specimens they were — with her own 
hands. 

With the exception of the ground covered by the 
workmen’s huts, we had now exhausted the whole 
of our triangular area, and had found no tomb. I 
was still hopeful, but we decided to leave this par- 

1 Potsherds and flakes of limestone, used for sketching and writing 
purposes. 

83 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


ticular section until, by making a very early start 
in the autumn, we could accomplish it without 
causing inconvenience to visitors. 

For our next attempt we selected the small lateral 
valley in which the tomb of Thothmes III was 
situated. This occupied us throughout the whole 
of the two following seasons, and, though nothing 
intrinsically valuable was found, we discovered an 
interesting archaeological fact. The actual tomb in 
which Thothmes III was buried had been found by 
Loret in 1898, hidden in a cleft in an inaccessible 
spot some way up the face of the cliff. Excavating 
in the valley below, we came upon the beginning 
of a tomb, by its foundation-deposits originally 
intended for the same king. Presumably, while the 
work on this low-level tomb was in progress, it 
occurred to Thothmes or to his architect that the 
cleft in the rock above was a better site. It certainly 
presented better chances of concealment, if that were 
the reason for the change ; though probably the more 
plausible explanation would be that one of the tor- 
rential downpours of rain which visit Luxor occasion- 
ally may have flooded out the lower tomb, and 
suggested to Thothmes that his mummy would have 
a more comfortable resting-place on a higher level. 

Near by, at the entrance to another abandoned 
tomb, we came upon foundation-deposits of his wife 
Meryt-Re*Hat*shep-sut, sister of the great queen of 
that name. Whether we are to infer that she 
was buried there is a moot point, for it would be 
contrary to all custom to find a queen in The Valley. 
In any case the tomb was afterwards appropriated 
by the Theban official, Sen-nefer. 

We had now dug in The Valley for several seasons 

»4 










Our Prefatory Work at Thebes 


with extremely scanty results, and it became a much 
debated question whether we should continue the 
work, or try for a more profitable site elsewhere. 
After these barren years were we justified in going 
on with it? My own feeling was that so long as a 
single area of untouched ground remained the risk 
was worth taking. It is true that you may find less 
in more time in The Valley than in any other site in 
Egypt, but, on the other hand, if a lucky strike be 
made, you will be repaid for years and years of dull 
and unprofitable work. 

There was still, moreover, the combination of 
flint boulders and workmen’s huts at the foot of 
the tomb of Rameses VI to be investigated, and I 
had always had a kind of superstitious feeling that 
in that particular corner of The Valley one of the 
missing kings, possibly Tut-ankh-Amen, might be 
found. Certainly the stratification of the debris there 
should indicate a tomb. Eventually we decided to 
devote a final season to The Valley, and, by making 
an early start, to cut off access to the tomb of 
Rameses VI, if that should prove necessary, at a 
time when it would cause least inconvenience to 
visitors. That brings us to the present season and 
the results that are known to everyone. 


85 



CHAPTER V 

The Finding of the Tomb 

T HE history of The Valley, as I have endea- 
voured to show in former chapters, has never 
lacked the dramatic element, and in this, 
the latest episode, it has held to its traditions. For 
consider the circumstances. This was to be our final 
season in The Valley. Six full seasons we had ex- 
cavated there, and season after season had drawn a 
blank ; we had worked for months at a stretch and 
found nothing, and only an excavator knows how 
desperately depressing that can be ; we had almost 
made up our minds that we were beaten, and were 
preparing to leave The Valley and try our luck 
elsewhere ; and then — hardly had we set hoe to 
ground in our last despairing effort than we made a 
discovery that far exceeded our wildest dreams. 
Surely, never before in the whole history of excava- 
tion has a full digging season been compressed within 
the space of five days. 

Let me try and tell the story of it all. It will 
not be easy, for the dramatic suddenness of the 
initial discovery left me in a dazed condition, and the 
months that have followed have been so crowded with 
incident that I have hardly had time to think. 
Setting it down on paper will perhaps give me a 
chance to realize what has happened and all that 
it means. 

I arrived in Luxor on October 28th, and by 

86 



Plate XI 


VIEW OF THE ROYAL CEMETERY: SHOWING THE RELATIVE POSITION 
OF THE TOMBS OF TUT ANKH- AMEN (a) AND RAMESES VI (b). 





The Finding of the Tomb 


November 1st I had enrolled my workmen and was 
ready to begin. Our former excavations had stopped 
short at the north-east corner of the tomb of Raineses 
VI, and from this point I started trenching south- 
wards. It will be remembered that in this area there 
were a number of roughly constructed workmen’s 
huts, used probably by the labourers in the tomb of 
Rameses. These huts, built about three feet above 
bed-rock, covered the whole area in front of the 
Ramesside tomb, and continued in a southerly 
direction to join up with a similar group of huts on 
the opposite side of The Valley, discovered by Davis 
in connexion with his work on the Akh-en-Aten 
cache. By the evening of November 3rd we had 
laid bare a sufficient number of these huts for experi- 
mental purposes, so, after we had planned and noted 
them, they were removed, and we were ready to 
clear away the three feet of soil that lay beneath 
them. 

Hardly had I arrived on the work next morning 
(November 4th) than the unusual silence, due to the 
stoppage of the work, made me realize that something 
out of the ordinary had happened, and I was greeted 
by the announcement that a step cut in the rock 
had been discovered underneath the very first hut 
to be attacked. This seemed too good to be true, 
but a short amount of extra clearing revealed the 
fact that we were actually in the entrance of a steep 
cut in the rock, some thirteen feet below the entrance 
to the tomb of Rameses VI, and a similar depth from 
the present bed level of The Valley (Plate XI). The 
manner of cutting was that of the sunken stairway 
entrance so common in The Valley, and I almost 
dared to hope that we had found our tomb at last. 

»7 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


Work continued feverishly throughout the whole of 
that day and the morning of the next, but it was not 
until the afternoon of November 5th that we suc- 
ceeded in clearing away the masses of rubbish that 
overlay the cut, and were able to demarcate the 
upper edges of the stairway on all its four sides 
(Plate XII). 

It was clear by now beyond any question that 
we actually had before us the entrance to a tomb, 
but doubts, born of previous disappointments, per- 
sisted in creeping in. There was always the horrible 
possibility, suggested by our experience in the 
Thothmes III Valley, that the tomb was an un- 
finished one, never completed and never used : if 
it had been finished there was the depressing prob- 
ability that it had been completely plundered in 
ancient times. On the other hand, there was just 
the chance of an untouched or only partially plun- 
dered tomb, and it was with ill-suppressed excite- 
ment that I watched the descending steps of the 
staircase, as one by one they came to light. The 
cutting was excavated in the side of a small hillock, 
and, as the work progressed, its western edge receded 
under the slope of the rock until it was,' first partially, 
and then completely, roofed in, and became a passage, 
10 feet high by 6 feet wide. Work progressed more 
rapidly now ; step succeeded step, and at the level 
of the twelfth, towards sunset, there was disclosed the 
upper part of a doorway, blocked, plastered, and sealed. 

A sealed doorway — it was actually true, then ! 
Our years of patient labour were to be rewarded 
after all, and I think my first feeling was one of 
congratulation that my faith in The Valley had not 
been unjustified. With excitement growing to fever 

88 







The Finding of the Tomb 


heat I searched the seal impressions on the door for 
evidence of the identity of the owner, but could find 
no name : the only decipherable ones were those of 
the well-known royal necropolis seal, the jackal and 
nine captives. Two facts, however, were clear : first, 
the employment of this royal seal was certain evidence 
that the tomb had been constructed for a person of 
very high standing ; and second, that the sealed door 
was entirely screened from above by workmen’s huts 
of the Twentieth Dynasty was sufficiently clear 
proof that at least from that date it had never been 
entered. With that for the moment I had to be 
content. 

While examining the seals I noticed, at the top 
of the doorway, where some of the plaster had fallen 
away, a heavy wooden lintel. Under this, to assure 
myself of the method by which the doorway had been 
blocked, I made a small peephole, just large enough 
to insert an electric torch, and discovered that the 
passage beyond the door was filled completely from 
floor to ceiling with stones and rubble — additional 
proof this of the care with which the tomb had been 
protected. 

It was a thrilling moment for an excavator. Alone, 
save for my native workmen, I found myself, after 
years of comparatively unproductive labour, on the 
threshold of what might prove to be a magnificent 
discovery. Anything, literally anything, might lie 
beyond that passage, and it needed all my self- 
control to keep from breaking down the doorway, 
and investigating then and there. 

One thing puzzled me, and that was the smallness 
of the opening in comparison with the ordinary 
Valley tombs. The design was certainly of the 

h 89 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


Eighteenth Dynasty. Could it be the tomb of a noble 
buried here by royal consent ? Was it a royal 
cache, a hiding-place to which a mummy and its 
equipment had been removed for safety ? Or was 
it actually the tomb of the king for whom I had 
spent so many years in search ? 

Once more I examined the seal impressions for 
a clue, but on the part of the door so far laid bare only 
those of the royal necropolis seal already mentioned 
were clear enough to read. Had I but known that 
a few inches lower down there was a perfectly clear 
and distinct impression of the seal of Tut-ankh- 
Amen, the king I most desired to find, I would have 
cleared on, had a much better night’s rest in con- 
sequence, and saved myself nearly three weeks of 
uncertainty. It was late, however, and darkness 
was already upon us. With some reluctance I 
re-closed the small hole that I had made, filled in 
our excavation for protection during the night, 
selected the most trustworthy of my workmen — 
themselves almost as excited as I was — to watch 
all night above the tomb, and so home by moonlight, 
riding down The Valley. 

Naturally my wish was to go straight ahead with 
our clearing to find out the full extent of the dis- 
covery, but Lord Carnarvon was in England, and in 
fairness to him I had to delay matters until he 
could come. Accordingly, on the morning of Novem- 
ber 6th I sent him the following cable : — “ At last 
have made wonderful discovery in Valley ; a mag- 
nificent tomb with seals intact; re-covered same for 
your arrival ; congratulations.” 

My next task was to secure the doorway against 
interference until such time as it could finally be 

90 







Plate XIII 


THE SIXTEEN STEPS, 




The Finding of the Tomb 


re-opened. This we did by filling our excavation 
up again to surface level, and rolling on top of it 
the large flint boulders of which the workmen’s 
huts had been composed. By the evening of the 
same day, exactly forty-eight hours after we had 
discovered the first step of the staircase, this was 
accomplished. The tomb had vanished. So far as 
the appearance of the ground was concerned there 
never had been any tomb, and I found it hard to 
persuade myself at times that the whole episode had 
not been a dream. 

I was soon to be reassured on this point. News 
travels fast in Egypt, and within two days of the 
discovery congratulations, inquiries, and offers of help 
descended upon me in a steady stream from all 
directions. It became clear, even at this early stage, 
that I was in for a job that could not be tackled 
single-handed, so I wired to Callender, who had 
helped me on various previous occasions, asking him 
if possible to join me without delay, and to my 
relief he arrived on the very next day. On the 8th 
I had received two messages from Lord Carnarvon 
in answer to my cable, the first of which read, “ Pos- 
sibly come soon,” and the second, received a little 
later, “ Propose arrive Alexandria 20th.” 

We had thus nearly a fortnight’s grace, and we 
devoted it to making preparations of various kinds, 
so that when the time of re-opening came, we should 
be able, with the least possible delay, to handle 
any situation that might arise. On the night of 
the 18th I went to Cairo for three days, to meet 
Lord Carnarvon and make a number of necessary 
purchases, returning to Luxor on the 21st. On the 
23rd Lord Carnarvon arrived in Luxor with his 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


daughter, Lady Evelyn Herbert, his devoted com- 
panion in all his Egyptian work, and everything was 
in hand for the beginning of the second chapter of 
the discovery of the tomb. Callender had been busy 
all day clearing away the upper layer of rubbish, so 
that by morning we should be able to get into the 
staircase without any delay. 

By the afternoon of the 24th the whole staircase 
was clear, sixteen steps in all (Plate XIII), and we were 
able to make a proper examination of the sealed 
doorway. On the lower part the seal impressions 
were much clearer, and we were able without any 
difficulty to make out on several of them the name of 
Tut-ankh-Amen (Plate XIV). This added enormously 
to the interest of the discovery. If we had found, as 
seemed almost certain, the tomb of that shadowy mon- 
arch, whose tenure of the throne coincided with one of 
the most interesting periods in the whole of Egyptian 
history, we should indeed have reason to congratulate 
ourselves. 

With heightened interest, if that were possible, 
we renewed our investigation of the doorway. Here 
for the first time a disquieting element made its 
appearance. Now that the whole door was exposed 
to light it was possible to discern a fact that had 
hitherto escaped notice — that there had been two 
successive openings and re-closings of a part of its 
surface : furthermore, that the sealing originally 
discovered, the jackal and nine captives, had been 
applied to the re-closedf portions, whereas the sealings 
of Tut-ankh-Amen covered the untouched part of 
the doorway, and were therefore those with which 
the tomb had been originally secured. The tomb 
then was not absolutely intact, as we had hoped. 

9 ® 




The Finding of the Tomb 


Plunderers had entered it, and entered it more than 
once — from the evidence of the huts above, plunderers 
of a date not later than the reign of Rameses VI — 
but that they had not rifled it completely was evident 
from the fact that it had been re-sealed. 1 

Then came another puzzle. In the lower strata 
of rubbish that filled the staircase we found masses of 
broken potsherds and boxes, the latter bearing the 
names of Akh en-Aten, Smenkh'ka’Re and Tut-ankh* 
Amen, and, what was much more upsetting, a scarab 
of Thothmes III and a fragment with the name of 
Amen hetep III. Why this mixture of names ? 
The balance of evidence so far would seem to indicate 
a cache rather than a tomb, and at this stage in the 
proceedings we inclined more and more to the opinion 
that we were about to find a miscellaneous collection 
of objects of the Eighteenth Dynasty kings, brought 
from Tell el Amama by Tut-ankh-Amen and deposited 
here for safety. 

So matters stood on the evening of the 24th. 
On the following day the sealed doorway was to 
be removed, so Callender set carpenters to work 
making a heavy wooden grille to be set up in its 
place. Mr. Enge bach. Chief Inspector of the An- 
tiquities Department, paid us a visit during the 
afternoon, and witnessed part of the final clearing 
of rubbish from the doorway. 

On the morning of the 25th the seal impres- 
sions on the doorway were carefully noted and photo- 
graphed, and then we removed the actual blocking 
of the door, consisting of rough stones carefully built 


1 From later evidence we found that this re-sealing could not have 
taken place later than the reign of Horemheb, i.e. from ten to fifteen 
years after the burial. 


93 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


from floor to lintel, and heavily plastered on their 
outer faces to take the seal impressions. 

This disclosed the beginning of a descending 
passage (not a staircase), the same width as the 
entrance stairway, and nearly seven feet high. As 
I had already discovered from my hole in the door- 
way, it was filled completely with stone and rubble, 
probably the chip from its own excavation. This 
filling, like the doorway, showed distinct signs of 
more than one opening and re-closing of the tomb, 
the untouched part consisting of clean white chip, 
mingled with dust, whereas the disturbed part was 
composed mainly of dark flint. It was clear that an 
irregular tunnel had been cut through the original 
filling at the upper comer on the left side, a tunnel 
corresponding in position with that of the hole in 
the doorway. 

As we cleared the passage we found, mixed with 
the rubble of the lower levels, broken potsherds, 
jar sealings, alabaster jars, whole and broken, vases 
of painted pottery, numerous fragments of smaller 
articles, and water skins, these last having obviously 
been used to bring up the water needed for the 
plastering of the doorways. These were clear evi- 
dence of plundering, and we eyed them askance. 
By night we had cleared a considerable distance down 
the passage, but as yet saw no sign of second 
doorway or of chamber. 

The day following (November 26th) was the day 
of days, the most wonderful that I have ever lived 
through, and certainly one whose like I can never 
hope to see again. Throughout the morning the work 
of clearing continued, slowly perforce, on account of 
the delicate objects that were mixed with the filling. 








The Finding of the Tomb 


Then, in the middle of the afternoon, thirty feet 
down from the outer door, we came upon a second 
sealed doorway, almost an exact replica of the first. 
The seal impressions in this case were less distinct, 
but still recognizable as those of Tut-ankh-Amen and 
of the royal necropolis. Here again the signs of 
opening and re-closing were clearly marked upon 
the plaster. We were firmly convinced by this time 
that it was a cache that we were about to open, and 
not a tomb. The arrangement of stairway, entrance 
passage and doors reminded us very forcibly of the 
cache of Akh-en-Aten and Tyi material found in 
the very near vicinity of the present excavation by 
Davis, and the fact that Tut-ankh-Amen’s seals 
occurred there likewise seemed almost certain proof 
that we were right in our conjecture. We were soon 
to know. There lay the sealed doorway, and behind 
it was the answer to the question. 

Slowly, desperately slowly it seemed to us as we 
watched, the remains of passage debris that encum- 
bered the lower part of the doorway were removed, 
until at last we had the whole door clear before us. 
The decisive moment had arrived. With trembling 
hands I made a tiny breach in the upper left hand 
corner. Darkness and blank space, as far as an 
iron testing-rod could reach, showed that whatever 
lay beyond was empty, and not filled like the passage 
we had just cleared. Candle tests were applied as a 
precaution against possible foul gases, and then, 
widening the hole a little, I inserted the candle and 
peered in, Lord Carnarvon, Lady Evelyn and Callen- 
der standing anxiously beside me to hear the verdict. 
At first I could see nothing, the hot air escaping from 
the chamber causing the candle flame to flicker, but 

95 




The Tomb of TutankhAmen 


presently, as my eyes grew accustomed to the light, 
details of the room within emerged slowly from the 
mist, strange animals, statues, and gold — everywhere 
the glint of gold. For the moment — an eternity it 
must have seemed to the others standing by — I 
was struck dumb with amazement, and when Lord 
Carnarvon, unable to stand the suspense any longer, 
inquired anxiously, “ Can you see anything ? ” it 
was all I could do to get out the words, “ Yes, w r on- 
derful things.” Then widening the hole a little 
further, so that we both could see, we inserted an 
electric torch. 


96 






ii 


r’asV^ 

y s «_ x 


■ SBK 1 8 

l?*g 

iiiiiiiiii 


1 


Plate XV 


IEW OF THE ANTECHAMBER AS SEEN FROM THE PASSAGE THROUGH 

T1TF! STEEL (;RILLE. 





CHAPTER VI 

A Preliminary Investigation 

I SUPPOSE most excavators would confess to a 
feeling of awe — embarrassment almost — when 
they break into a chamber closed and sealed 
by pious hands so many centuries ago. For the 
moment, time as a factor in human life has lost its 
meaning. Three thousand, four thousand years may- 
be, have passed and gone since human feet last trod 
the floor on which you stand, and yet, as you note 
the signs of recent life around you — the half-filled 
bowl of mortar for the door, the blackened lamp, 
the finger-mark upon the freshly painted surface, 
the farewell garland dropped upon the threshold — 
you feel it might have been but yesterday. The 
very air you breathe, unchanged throughout the 
centuries, you share with those who laid the mummy 
to its rest. Time is annihilated by little intimate 
details such as these, and you feel an intruder. 

That is perhaps the first and dominant sensation, 
but others follow thick and fast — the exhilaration of 
discovery, the fever of suspense, the almost over- 
mastering impulse, born of curiosity, to break down 
seals and lift the lids of boxes, the thought — pure 
joy to the investigator — that you are about to add 
a page to history, or solve some problem of research, 
the strained expectancy — why not confess it ? — of the 
treasure-seeker. Did these thoughts actually pass 
through our minds at the time, or have I imagined 

97 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


them since ? I cannot tell. It was the discovery 
that my memory was blank, and not the mere desire 
for dramatic chapter-ending, that occasioned this 
digression. 

Surely never before in the whole history of exca- 
vation had such an amazing sight been seen as the 
light of our torch revealed to us. The reader can 
get some idea of it by reference to the photographs 
on Plates XVI-XX, but these were taken afterwards 
when the tomb had been opened and electric light 
installed. Let him imagine how they appeared to 
us as we looked down upon them from our spy-hole 
in the blocked doorway, casting the beam of light 
from our torch — the first light that had pierced 
the darkness of the chamber for three thousand 
'years — from one group of objects to another, in a 
vain attempt to interpret the treasure that lay 
before us. The effect was bewildering, overwhelming. 
I suppose we had never formulated exactly in our 
minds just what we had expected or hoped to see, 
but certainly we had never dreamed of anything 
like this, a roomful — a whole museumful it seemed 
— of objects, some familiar, but some the like of 
which we had never seen, piled one upon another 
in seemingly endless profusion. 

Gradually the scene grew clearer, and we could 
pick out individual objects. First, right opposite to 
us — we had been conscious of them all the while, 
but refused to believe in them — were three great 
gilt couches, their sides carved in the form of mon- 
strous animals, curiously attenuated in body, as 
they had to be to serve their purpose, but with 
heads of startling realism. Uncanny beasts enough 
to look upon at any time : seen as we saw them, 

o8 






A Preliminary Investigation 


their brilliant gilded surfaces picked out of the dark- 
ness by our electric torch, as though by limelight, 
their heads throwing grotesque distorted shadows on 
the wall behind them, they were almost terrifying. 
Next, on the right, two statues caught and held our 
attention ; two life-sized figures of a king in black, 
facing each other like sentinels, gold kilted, gold 
sandalled, armed with mace and staff, the protective 
sacred cobra upon their foreheads. 

These were the dominant objects that caught the 
eye at first. Between them, around them, piled on 
top of them, there were countless others — exquisitely 
painted and inlaid caskets ; alabaster vases, some 
beautifully carved in openwork designs ; strange 
black shrines, from the open door of one a great 
gilt snake peeping out ; bouquets of flowers or leaves ; 
beds ; chairs beautifully carved ; a golden inlaid 
throne ; a heap of curious white oviform boxes ; 
staves of all shapes and designs ; beneath our eyes, 
on the very threshold of the chamber, a beautiful 
lotiform cup of translucent alabaster ; on the left 
a confused pile of overturned chariots, glistening 
with gold and inlay ; and peeping from behind them 
another portrait of a king. 

Such were some of the objects that lay before us. 
Whether we noted them all at the time I cannot 
say for certain, as our minds were in much too excited 
and confused a state to register accurately. Presently 
it dawned upon our bewildered brains that in all 
this medley of objects before us there was no coffin 
or trace of mummy, and the much-debated question 
of tomb or cache began to intrigue us afresh. With 
this question in view we re-examined the scene 
before us, and noticed for the first time that between 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


the^two black sentinel statues on the right there 
was another sealed doorway. The explanation gra- 
dually dawned upon us. We were but on the thres- 
hold of our discovery. What we saw was merely 
an antechamber. Behind the guarded door there 
were to be other chambers, possibly a succession of 
them, and in one of them, beyond any shadow of 
doubt, in all his magnificent panoply of death, we 
should find the Pharaoh lying. 

We had seen enough, and our brains began to 
reel at the thought of the task in front of us. We 
re-closed the hole, locked the wooden grille that had 
been placed upon the first doorway, left our native 
staff on guard, mounted our donkeys and rode home 
down The Valley, strangely silent and subdued. 

It was curious, as we talked things over in the 
evening, to find how conflicting our ideas were as to 
what we had seen. Each of us had noted something 
that the others had not, and it amazed us next day 
to discover how many and how obvious were the 
things that we had missed. Naturally, it was the 
sealed door between the statues that intrigued us 
most, and we debated far into the night the possi- 
bilities of what might lie behind it. A single chamber 
with the king’s sarcophagus ? That was the least 
we might expect. But why one chamber only ? 
Why not a succession of passages and chambers, 
leading, in true Valley style, to an innermost shrine 
of all, the burial chamber ? It might be so, and yet 
in plan the tomb was quite unlike the others. Visions 
of chamber after chamber, each crowded with objects 
like the one we had seen, passed through our minds 
and left us gasping for breath. Then came the 
thought of the plunderers again. Had they suc- 

lOO 




A Preliminary Investigation 


ceeded in penetrating this third doorway — seen from 
a distance it looked absolutely untouched — and, if 
so, what were our chances of finding the king’s 
mummy intact ? I think we slept but little, all of 
us, that night. 

Next morning (November 27th) we were early 
on the field, for there was much to be done. It was 
essential, before proceeding further with our exam- 
ination, that we should have some more adequate 
means of illumination, so Callender began laying wires 
to connect us up with the main lighting system of 
The Valley. While this was in preparation we made 
careful notes of the seal-impressions upon the inner 
doorway and then removed its entire blocking. By 
noon everything was ready and Lord Carnarvon, 
Lady Evelyn, Callender and I entered the tomb 
and made a careful inspection of the first chamber 
(afterwards called the Antechamber). The evening 
before I had written to Mr. Engelbach, the Chief 
Inspector of the Antiquities Department, advising 
him of the progress of clearing, and asking him to 
come over and make an official inspection. Un- 
fortunately he was at the moment in Kena on official 
business, so the local Antiquities Inspector, Ibraham 
Effendi, came in his stead. 

By the aid of our powerful electric lamps many 
things that had been obscure to us on the previous 
day became clear, and we were able to make a more 
accurate estimate of the extent of our discovery. 
Our first objective was naturally the sealed door 
between the statues, and here a disappointment 
awaited us. Seen from a distance it presented all 
the appearance of an absolutely intact blocking, but 
close examination revealed the fact that a small 


IOI 




The Tomb of Tut'ankh'Amen 


breach had been made near the bottom, just wide 
enough to admit a boy or a slightly built man, and 
that the hole made had subsequently been filled 
up and re-sealed. We were not then to be the first. 
Here, too, the thieves had forestalled us, and it only 
remained to be seen how much damage they had 
had the opportunity or the time to effect. 

Our natural impulse was to break down the door, 
and get to the bottom of the matter at once, but to 
do so would have entailed serious risk of damage to 
many of the objects in the Antechamber, a risk 
which we were by no means prepared to face. Nor 
could we move the objects in question out of the 
way, for it was imperative that a plan and complete 
photographic record should be made before anything 
was touched, and this was a task involving a con- 
siderable amount of time, even if we had had suffi- 
cient plant available — which we had not — to carry it 
through immediately. Reluctantly we decided to 
abandon the opening of this inner sealed door until 
we had cleared the Antechamber of all its contents. 
By doing this we should not only ensure the complete 
scientific record of the outer chamber which it was 
our duty to make, but should have a clear field for 
the removal of the door-blocking, a ticklish operation 
at best. 

Having satisfied to some extent our curiosity 
about the sealed doorway, we could now turn our 
attention to the rest of the chamber, and make a 
more detailed examination of the objects which it 
contained. It was certainly an astounding experi- 
ence. Here, packed tightly together in this little 
chamber, were scores of objects, any one of which 
would have filled us with excitement under ordinary 

102 






A Preliminary Investigation 


circumstances, and been considered ample repayment 
for a full season’s work. Some were of types well 
enough known to us ; others were new and strange, 
and in some cases these were complete and perfect 
examples of objects whose appearance we had here- 
tofore but guessed at from the evidence of tiny 
broken fragments found in other royal tombs. 

Nor was it merely from a point of view of quantity 
that the find was so amazing. The period to which 
the tomb belongs is in many respects the most 
interesting in the whole history of Egyptian art, 
and we were prepared for beautiful things. What 
we were not prepared for was the astonishing vitality 
and animation which characterized certain of the 
objects. It was a revelation to us of unsuspected 
possibilities in Egyptian art, and we realized, even 
in this hasty preliminary survey, that a study of 
the material would involve a modification, if not a 
complete revolution, of all our old ideas. That, 
however, is a matter for the future. We shall get 
a clearer estimate of exact artistic values when we 
have cleared the whole tomb and have the complete 
contents before us. 

One of the first things we noted in our survey 
was that all of the larger objects, and most of the 
smaller ones, were inscribed with the name of Tut* 
ankh*Amen. His, too, were the seals upon the inner- 
most door, and therefore his, beyond any shadow of 
doubt, the mummy that ought to lie behind it. 
Next, while we were still excitedly calling each other 
from one object to another, came a new discovery. 
Peering beneath the southernmost of the three 
great couches, we noticed a small irregular hole in 
the wall. Here was yet another sealed doorway, and 

103 




The Tomb of Tut ankh' Amen 


a plunderers* hole, which, unlike the others, had never 
been repaired. Cautiously we crept under the couch, 
inserted our portable light, and there before us lay 
another chamber, rather smaller than the first, but 
even more crowded with objects. 

The state of this inner room (afterwards called 
the Annexe) simply defies description. In the Ante- 
chamber there had been some sort of an attempt to 
tidy up after the plunderers’ visit, but here everything 
was in confusion, just as they had left it. Nor did it 
take much imagination to picture them at their 
work. One — there would probably not have been 
room for more than one — had crept into the chamber, 
and had then hastily but systematically ransacked 
its entire contents, emptying boxes, throwing things 
aside, piling them one upon another, and occasionally 
passing objects through the hole to his companions 
for closer examination in the outer chamber. He 
had done his work just about as thoroughly as an 
earthquake. Not a single inch of floor space remains 
vacant, and it will be a matter of considerable diffi- 
culty, when the time for clearing comes, to know how r 
to begin. So far we have not made any attempt to 
enter the chamber, but have contented ourselves 
with taking stock from outside. Beautiful things it 
contains, too, smaller than those in the Antechamber 
for the most part, but many of them of exquisite 
workmanship. Several things remain in my mind 
particularly — a painted box, apparently quite as 
lovely as the one in the Antechamber ; a wonderful 
chair of ivory, gold, wood, and leaf her- work ; ala- 
baster and faience vases of beautiful form ; and a 
gaming board, in carved and coloured ivory. 

I think the discovery of this second chamber, 

104 






A Preliminary Investigation 


with its crowded contents, had a somewhat sobering 
effect upon us. Excitement had gripped us hitherto, 
and given us no pause for thought, but now for the 
first time we began to realize what a prodigious task 
we had in front of us, and what a responsibility it 
entailed. This was no ordinary find, to be disposed 
of in a normal season’s work ; nor was there any 
precedent to show us how to handle it. The thing 
was outside all experience, bewildering, and for the 
moment it seemed as though there were more to be 
done than any human agency could accomplish. 

Moreover, the extent of our discovery had taken 
us by surprise, and we were wholly unprepared to 
deal with the multitude of objects that lay before 
us, many in a perishable condition, and needing 
careful preservative treatment before they could be 
touched. There were numberless things to be done 
before we could even begin the work of clearing. 
Vast stores of preservatives and packing material 
must be laid in ; expert advice must be taken as to 
the best method of dealing with certain objects ; 
provision must be made for a laboratory, some safe 
and sheltered spot in which the objects could be 
treated, catalogued and packed ; a careful plan to 
scale must be made, and a complete photographic 
record taken, while everything was still in position ; 
a dark-room must be contrived. 

These were but a few of the problems that con- 
fronted us. Clearly, the first thing to be done was 
to render the tomb safe against robbery ; we could 
then with easy minds work out our plans — plans 
which we realized by this time would involve, not 
one season only, but certainly two, and possibly 
three or four. We had our wooden grille at the 

i 105 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh'Amen 


entrance to the passage, but that was not enough, 
and I measured up the inner doorway for a gate of 
thick steel bars. Until we could get this made for 
us — and for this and for other reasons it was im- 
perative for me to visit Cairo — we must go to the 
labour of filling in the tomb once more. 

Meanwhile the news of the discovery had spread 
like wildfire, and all sorts of extraordinary and 
fanciful reports were going abroad concerning it; 
one story, that found considerable credence among 
the natives, being to the effect that three aeroplanes 
had landed in The Valley, and gone off to some 
destination unknown with loads of treasure. To 
overtake these rumours as far as possible, we decided 
on two things — first, to invite Lord Allenby and 
the various heads of the departments concerned 
to come and pay a visit to the tomb, and secondly, 
to send an authoritative account of the discovery to 
The Times. On the 29th, accordingly, we had an 
official opening of the tomb, at which were present 
Lady Allenby — Lord Allenby was unfortunately un- 
able to leave Cairo — Abd el Aziz Bey Yehia, the 
Governor of the Province, Mohamed Bey Fahmy, 
Mamour of the District, and a number of other 
Egyptian notables and officials ; and on the 30th 
Mr. Tottenham, Adviser to the Ministry of Public 
Works, and M. Pierre Lacau, Director-General of the 
Service of Antiquities, who had been unable to be 
present on the previous day, made their official 
inspection. Mr. Merton, The Times correspondent, 
was also present at the official opening, and sent the 
dispatch which created so much excitement at home. 

On December 8rd, after closing up the entrance 
doorway with heavy timber, the tomb was filled to 

106 







A Preliminary Investigation 


surface level. Lord Carnarvon and Lady Evelyn 
left on the 4th, on their way to England, to conclude 
various arrangements there, preparatory to return- 
ing later in the season ; and on the 6th, leaving 
Callender to watch over the tomb in my absence, 
I followed them to Cairo to make my purchases. 
My first care was the steel gate, and I ordered it 
the morning I arrived, under promise that it should 
be delivered within six days. The other purchases 
I took more leisurely, and a miscellaneous collection 
they were, including photographic material, chemi- 
cals, a motor-car, packing-boxes of every kind, with 
thirty-two bales of calico, more than a mile of wad- 
ding, and as much again of surgical bandages. Of 
these last two important items I was determined not 
to run short. 

While in Cairo I had time to take stock of the 
position, and it became more and more clear to me 
that assistance — and that on a big scale — was neces- 
sary if the work in the tomb was to be carried out 
in a satisfactory manner. The question was, where 
to turn for this assistance. The first and pressing 
need was in photography, for nothing could be 
touched until a complete photographic record 
had been made, a task involving technical skill of 
the highest order. A day or two after I arrived in 
Cairo I received a cable of congratulation from Mr. 
Lythgoe, Curator of the Egyptian Department of 
the Metropolitan Museum of Art New York, whose 
concession at Thebes ran in close proximity to our 
own, being only divided by the natural mountain 
wall, and in my reply I somewhat diffidently in- 
quired whether it would be possible — for the imme- 
diate emergency, at any rate — to secure the assist- 

107 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


ance of Mr. Harry Burton, their photographic expert. 
He promptly cabled back, and his cable ought to 
go on record as an example of disinterested scientific 
co-operation: “Only too delighted to assist in any 
possible way. Please call on Burton and any other 
members of our staff.” 

This offer was subsequently most generously con- 
firmed by the Trustees and the Director of the 
Metropolitan Museum, and on my return to Luxor 
I arranged with my friend Mr. Winlock, the director 
of the New York excavations on that concession, 
and who was to be the actual sufferer under the 
arrangement, not only that Mr. Burton should be 
transferred, but that Mr. Hall and Mr. Hauser, 
draughtsmen to the expedition, should devote such 
of their time as might be necessary to make a large- 
scale drawing of the Antechamber and its contents. 
Another member of the New York staff, Mr. Mace, 
director of their excavations on the pyramid field at 
Lisht, was also available, and at Mr. Lythgoe’s 
suggestion cabled offering help. Thus no fewer than 
four members of the New York staff were for whole 
or part time associated in the work of the season. 
Without this generous help it would have been 
impossible to tackle the enormous amount of work in 
front of us. 

Another piece of luck befell me in Cairo. Mr. 
Lucas, Director of the Chemical Department of the 
Egyptian Government, was taking three months’ 
leave prior to retiring from the Government on com- 
pletion of service, and for this three months he 
generously offered to place his chemical knowledge 
at our disposal, an offer which, needless to say, I 
hastened to accept. That completed our regular 





INTERIOR OF ANTECHAMBER : THE ENTRANCE WITH STEEL G. 



A Preliminary Investigation 


working staff. In addition, Dr. Alan Gardiner kindly 
undertook to deal with any inscriptional material 
that might be found, and Professor Breasted, in a 
couple of visits, gave us much assistance in the 
difficult task of deciphering the historical significance 
of the seal impressions from the doors. 

By December 13th the steel gate was finished and 
I had completed my purchases. I returned to Luxor, 
and on the 15th everything arrived safely in The 
Valley, delivery of the packages having been greatly 
expedited by the courtesy of the Egyptian State Rail- 
way officials, who permitted them to travel by express 
instead of on the slow freight train. On the 16th 
we opened up the tomb once more, and on the 17th 
the steel gate was set up in the door of the chamber 
and we were ready to begin work. On the 18th 
work was actually begun, Burton making his first 
experiments in the Antechamber, and Hall and 
Hauser making a start on their plan. Two days 
later Lucas arrived, and at once began experimenting 
on preservatives for the various classes of objects. 

On the 22nd, as the result of a good deal of 
clamour, permission to see the tomb was given to 
the Press, both European and native, and the oppor- 
tunity was also afforded to a certain number of the 
native notables of Luxor, who had been disappointed 
at not receiving an invitation to the official open- 
ing. It had only been possible on that occasion to 
invite a very limited number, owing to a difficulty 
of ensuring the safety of the objects in the very 
narrow space that was available. On the 25th Mace 
arrived, and two days later, photographs and plans 
being sufficiently advanced, the first object was 
removed from the tomb. 


i°9 




CHAPTER VII 

A Survey of the Antechamber 

I N this chapter we propose to make a detailed survey 
of the objects in the Antechamber, and it will give 
the reader a better idea of things if we make it 
systematically, and do not range backwards and for- 
wards from one end of it to the other, as in the 
first excitement of discovery we naturally did. It 
was but a small room, some 26 feet by 12 feet, and 
we had to tread warily, for, though the officials had 
cleared for us a small alley-way in the centre, a 
single false step or hasty movement would have in- 
flicted irreparable damage on one of the delicate 
objects with which we were surrounded. 

In front of us, in the doorway — we had to step 
over it to get into the chamber — lay the beautiful 
wishing-cup shown on Plate XL VI. It was of pure 
semi-translucent alabaster, with lotus-flower handles 
on either side, supporting the kneeling figures which 
symbolize Eternity. Turning right as we entered, we 
noticed, first, a large cylindrical jar of alabaster ; 
next, two funerary bouquets of leaves, one leaning 
against the wall, the other fallen ; and in front of 
them, standing out into the chamber, a painted 
wooden casket (see Plate XXI). This last will probably 
rank as one of the greatest artistic treasures of the 
tomb, and on our first visit we found it hard to tear 
ourselves away from it. Its outer face was completely 
covered with gesso ; upon this prepared surface there 

IIO 







A Survey of the Antechamber 


were a series of brilliantly coloured and exquisitely 
painted designs — hunting scenes upon the curved 
panels of the lid, battle scenes upon the sides, and 
upon the ends representations of the king in lion 
form, trampling his enemies under his feet. The 
illustrations on Plates L-LIV give but a faint idea 
of the delicacy of the painting, which far surpasses 
anything of the kind that Egypt has yet produced. 
No photograph could do it justice, for even in the 
original a magnifying glass is essential to a due 
appreciation of the smaller details, such as the 
stippling of the lions’ coats, or the decoration of the 
horses’ trappings. 

There is another remarkable thing about the 
painted scenes upon this box. The motives are 
Egyptian and the treatment Egyptian, and yet they 
leave an impression on your mind of something 
strangely non-Egyptian, and you cannot for the life 
of you explain exactly where the difference lies. 
They remind you of other things, too — the finest 
Persian miniatures, for instance — and there is a 
curious floating impression of Benozzo Gozzoli, due, 
maybe, to the gay little tufts of flowers which fill 
the vacant spaces. The contents of the box were a 
queer jumble. At the top there were a pair of rush 
and papyrus sandals, and a royal robe, completely 
covered with a decoration of beadwork and gold 
sequins. Beneath them were other decorated robes, 
one of which had had attached to it upwards of 
three thousand gold rosettes, three pairs of Court 
sandals elaborately worked in gold, a gilt head-rest, 
and other miscellaneous objects. This was the first 
box we opened, and the ill-assorted nature of its 
contents — to say nothing of the manner in which 


in 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 

they were crushed and bundled together — was a con- 
siderable puzzle to us. The reason of it became 
plain enough later, as we shall show in the following 
chapter. 

Next, omitting some small unimportant objects, 
we came to the end (north) wall of the chamber. 
Here was the tantalizing sealed doorway, and on 
either side of it, mounting guard over the entrance, 
stood the life-size wooden statues of the king already 
described. Strange and imposing figures these, even 
as we first saw them, surrounded and half concealed 
by other objects : as they stand now in the empty 
chamber, with nothing in front of them to distract 
the eye, and beyond them, through the opened door, 
the golden shrine half visible, they present an appear- 
ance that is almost painfully impressive. Originally 
they were shrouded in shawls of linen, and this, too, 
must have added to the effect. One other point 
about this end wall, and an interesting one. Unlike 
the other walls of the chamber, its whole surface 
was covered with plaster, and a close examination 
revealed the fact that from top to bottom it was 
but a blind, a mere partition wall. 

Turning now to the long (west) wall of the cham- 
ber, we found the whole of the wall-space occupied 
by the three great animal-sided couches, curious 
pieces of furniture which we knew from illustrations 
in the tomb paintings, but of w'hich we had never 
seen actual examples before. The first was lion- 
headed, the second cow-headed, and the third had 
the head of a composite animal, half hippopotamus 
and half crocodile. Each was made in four pieces 
for convenience in carrying, the frame of the actual 
bed fitting by means of hook and staple to the 

113 




A Survey of the Antechamber 


animal sides, the feet of the animals themselves fit- 
ting into an open pedestal. As is usually the case 
in Egyptian beds, each had a foot panel but nothing 
at the head. Above, below, and around these couches, 
packed tightly together, and in some cases perched 
precariously one upon another, was a miscellany of 
smaller objects, of which we shall only have space 
here to mention the more important. 

Thus, resting on the northernmost of the couches 
— the lion-headed one — there was a bed of ebony 
and woven cord, with a panel of household gods 
delightfully carved, and, resting upon this again, 
there were a collection of elaborately decorated staves, 
a quiverful of arrows, and a number of compound 
bows. One of these last was cased with gold and 
decorated with bands of inscription and animal 
motives in granulated work of almost inconceivable 
fineness — a masterpiece of jewellers’ craft. Another, 
a double compound bow, terminated at either end 
in the carved figure of a captive, so arranged that 
their necks served as notches for the string, the 
pleasing idea being that every time the king used 
the bow he bow-strung a brace of captives. Be- 
tween bed and couch there were four torch-holders 
of bronze and gold, absolutely new in type, one with 
its torch of twisted linen still in position in the oil- 
cup ; a charmingly wrought alabaster libation vase ; 
and, its lid resting askew, a casket, with decorative 
panels of brilliant turquoise-blue faience and gold. 
This casket, as we found later in the laboratory, 
contained a number of interesting and valuable 
objects, among others a leopard-skin priestly robe, 
with decoration of gold and silver stars and gilt 
leopard-head, inlaid with coloured glass ; a very 

113 


The Tomb of Tut-ankhAmen 


large and beautifully worked scarab of gold and lapis 
lazuli blue glass ; a buckle of sheet gold, with a 
decoration of hunting scenes applied in infinitesimally 
small granules ; a sceptre in solid gold and lapis 
lazuli glass (Plate XXIII) ; beautifully coloured 
collarettes and necklaces of faience ; and a handful 
of massive gold rings, twisted up in a fold of linen — 
of which more anon. 

Beneath the couch, resting on the floor, stood a 
large chest, made of a delightful combination of 
ebony, ivory, and red wood, which contained a 
number of small vases of alabaster and glass ; two 
black wooden shrines, each containing the gilt figure 
of a snake, emblem and standard of the tenth nome 
of Upper Egypt (Aphroditopolis) ; a delightful little 
chair, with decorative panels of ebony, ivory, and 
gold, too small for other than a child’s use ; two 
folding duck-stools, inlaid with ivory ; and an 
alabaster box, w r ith incised ornamentation filled in 
with pigments. 

A long box of ebony and white painted wood, 
with trellis-worked stand and hinged lid, stood free 
upon the floor in front of the couch. Its contents 
were a curious mixture. At the top, crumpled to- 
gether and stuffed in as packing, there were shirts 
and a number of the king’s under-garments, whereas 
below% more or less orderly arranged upon the bottom 
of the box, there were sticks, bows, and a large num- 
ber of arrows, the points of these last having all 
been broken off and stolen for their metal. As 
originally deposited, the box probably contained 
nothing but sticks, bows and arrows, and included 
not only those from the top of the bed already 
described, but a number of others which had been 

114 








A Survey of the Antechamber 


scattered in various quarters of the chamber. Some 
of the sticks were of very remarkable workmanship. 
One terminated in a curve, on which were fashioned 
the figures of a pair of captives, with tied arms and 
interlocked feet, the one an African, the other an 
Asiatic, their faces carved in ebony and ivory re- 
spectively. The latter figure, an almost painfully 
realistic [piece of work, is shown on Plate LXX. On 
another of the sticks a very effective decoration was 
contrived by arranging minute scales of iridescent 
beetle-wings in a pattern, while in others again 
there was an applied pattern of variegated barks. 
With the sticks there were a whip in ivory and 
four cubit measures. To the left of the couch, 
between it and the next one, there were a toilet table 
and a cluster of wonderful perfume jars in carved 
alabaster {see Plate XXII). 

So much for the first couch. The second, the 
cow-headed one, facing us as we entered the chamber, 
was even more crowded. Resting precariously on 
top of it there was another bed of wood, painted 
white, and, balanced on top of this again, a rush- 
work chair, extraordinarily modern-looking in appear- 
ance and design, and an ebony and red-wood stool. 
Below the bed and resting actually on the framework 
of the couch, there were, among other things, an 
ornamental white stool, a curious rounded box of 
v ivory and ebony veneer, and a pair of gilt sistra 
— instruments of music that are usually associated 
with Hathor, the goddess of joy and dancing 1 
(Plate XXIII). Below, the centre space was occupied 
by a pile of oviform wooden cases, containing trussed 
ducks and a variety of other food offerings. 

1 These are two of the attributes of Hathor. There are many others 

”5 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


Standing on the floor in front of the couch there 
were two wooden boxes, one having a collarette and 
a pad of rings resting loose upon its lid ; a large 
stool of rush-work, and a smaller one of wood and 
reed. The larger of the two boxes had an interest- 
ing and varied list of contents. A docket, written 
in hieratic on the lid, quotes seventeen objects ol 
lapis lazuli blue, and within there were sixteen liba- 
tion vases of blue faience, the seventeenth being 
found subsequently in another part of the chamber. 
In addition, thrown carelessly in, there were a 
number of other faience cups; a pair of electrum 
boomerangs, mounted at either end with blue faience ; 
a beautiful little casket of carved ivory; a calcite 
wine-strainer; a very elaborate tapestry- woven gar- 
ment ; and the greater part of a corslet. This last 
— which we shall have occasion to describe at some 
length in Chapter X — was composed of several thou- 
sand pieces of gold, glass, and faience, and there is 
no doubt that when it has been cleaned and its 
various parts assembled it will be the most imposing 
thing of its kind that Egypt has ever produced. 
Between this couch and the third one, tilted care- 
lessly over on to its side, lay a magnificent cedar- 
wood chair, elaborately and delicately carved, and 
embellished with gold ( see Plate LX). 

We come now to the third couch, flanked by its 
pair of queer composite animals, with open mouths, 
and teeth and tongue of ivory. Resting on top of 
it in solitary state there was a large round-topped 
chest, with ebony frame and panels painted white. 
This was originally the chest of under-linen. It still 
contained a number of garments — loin-cloths, etc. — 
most of them folded and rolled into neat little 

116 





A B 

Plate XXIII 


(a) THE KING’S SCEPTRE OF GOLD AND LAPIS LAZULI BLUE 
GLASS, (b) TWO SISTRA OF GILT WOOD AND BRONZE. 







A Survey of the Antechamber 


bundles . 1 Below this couch stood another of the 
great artistic treasures of the tomb — perhaps the 
greatest so far taken out — a throne, overlaid with 
gold from top to bottom, and richly adorned with 
glass, faience, and stone inlay ( see Plate XXIV). Its 
legs, fashioned in feline form, were surmounted by lions’ 
heads, fascinating in their strength and simplicity. 
Magnificent crowned and winged serpents formed the 
arms, and between the bars which supported the back 
there were six protective cobras, carved in wood, 
gilt and inlaid. It was the panel of the back, how- 
ever, that was the chief glory of the throne, and I 
have no hesitation in claiming for it that it is the 
most beautiful thing that has yet been found in 
Egypt. A photograph, which without colour gives 
but a very inadequate idea of its beauty, is shown 
on Plate II. 

The scene is one of the halls of the palace, a room 
decorated with flower-garlanded pillars, frieze of 
urcei (royal cobras), and dado of conventional 
“ recessed ” panelling. Through a hole in the roof 
the sun shoots down his life-giving protective rays. 
The king himself sits in an unconventional attitude 
upon a cushioned throne, his arm thrown carelessly 
across its back. Before him stands the girlish figure 
of the queen, putting, apparently, the last touches 
to his toilet : in one hand she holds a small jar of 
scent or ointment, and with the other she gently 
anoints his shoulder or adds a touch of perfume to 
his collar. A simple homely little composition, but 
how instinct with life and feeling it is, and with 
what a sense of movement ! 

i These, on our first entrance into the tomb, were mistaken for roils 
of papyrus. 


1 1 7 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


The colouring of the panel is extraordinarily vivid 
and effective. The face and other exposed portions 
of the bodies, both of king and queen, are of red 
glass, and the head-dresses of brilliant turquoise-like 
faience. The robes are of silver, dulled by age to 
an exquisite bloom. The crowns, collars, scarves, 
and other ornamental details of the panel are all 
inlaid, inlay of coloured glass and faience, of carne- 
lian, and of a composition hitherto unknown — translu- 
cent fibrous calcite, underlaid with coloured paste, 
in appearance for all the world like millefiori glass. 
As background we have the sheet gold with which 
the throne was covered. In its original state, with 
gold and silver fresh and new, the throne must have 
been an absolutely dazzling sight — too dazzling, 
probably, for the eye of a Westerner, accustomed 
to drab skies and neutral tints : now, toned down a 
little by the tarnishing of the alloy, it presents a 
colour scheme that is extraordinarily attractive and 
harmonious. 

Apart altogether from its artistic merit, the throne 
is an important historical document, the scenes upon 
it being actual illustrations of the politico-religious 
vacillations of the reign. In original conception — 
witness the human arms on the sun-disk in the back 
panel — they are based on pure Tell el Amarna Aten 
worship. The cartouches, however, are curiously 
mixed. In some of them the Aten element has been 
erased and the Amen form substituted, whereas in 
others the Aten remains unchallenged. It is curious, 
to say the least of it, that an object which bore such 
manifest signs of heresy upon it should be publicly 
buried in this, the stronghold of the Amen faith, 
and it is perhaps not without significance that on 

118 




Plate XXIV 


THRONE ANn FnnTCTnm nrvp i m.r 





A Survey of the Antechamber 


this particular part of the throne there were remains 
of a linen wrapping. It would appear that Tut* 
ankh-Amen’s return to the ancient faith was not 
entirely a matter of conviction. He may have 
thought the throne too valuable a possession to 
destroy, and have kept it in one of the more private 
apartments of the palace ; or, again, it is possible 
that the alteration in the Aten names was sufficient 
to appease the sectarians, and that there was no 
need for secrecy. 

Upon the seat of the throne rested the footstool 
that originally stood before it, a stool of gilded wood 
and dark blue faience, with panels on the top and 
sides on which were represented captives, bound and 
prone. This was a very common convention in the 
East — “ until I make thine enemies thy footstool,” 
sings the Psalmist — and we may be sure that on 
certain occasions convention became actual fact. 

Before the couch there were two stools, one of 
plain wood painted white, the other of ebony, ivory,' 
and gold, its legs carved in the shape of ducks’ heads, 
its top made in the semblance of leopard skin, with 
claws and spots of ivory — the finest example we 
know of its kind. Behind it, resting against the 
south wall of the chamber, there were a number of 
important objects. First came a shrine-shaped box 
with double doors, fastened by shooting bolts of 
ebony. This was entirely cased with thick sheet- 
gold, and on the gold, in delicate low relief, there 
were a series of little panels (shown on Plate LXVIII), 
depicting, in delightfully naive fashion, a number 
of episodes in the daily life of king and queen. In 
all of these scenes the dominant note is that of 
friendly relationship between the husband and the 

119 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


wife, the unselfconscious friendliness that marks the 
Tell el Amarna school, and one would not be sur- 
prised to find that here, too, there had been a change 
in the cartouches from the Aten to the Amen. 
Within the shrine there was a pedestal, showing that 
it had originally contained a statuette : it may well 
have been a gold one, an object, unfortunately, too 
conspicuous for the plunderers to overlook. It also 
contained a necklace of enormous beads, gold, car- 
nelian, green feldspar and blue glass, to which was 
attached a large gold pendant in the shape of a very 
rare snake goddess ; and considerable portions of the 
corslet already referred to in our description of one 
of the earlier boxes. 

Beside this shrine there was a large shawabti 
statuette of the king, carved, gilded, and painted, 
and a little farther along, peering out from behind 
the overturned body of a chariot, a statue of pecu- 
liar form, cut sharp off at waist and elbows. This 
was exactly life-size, and its body was painted white 
in evident imitation of a shirt ; there can be very 
little doubt that it represents a mannequin, to which 
the king’s robes, and possibly his collars, could be 
fitted (Plate XXV). There were also in this same 
quarter of the chamber another toilet box and the 
scattered pieces of a gilt canopy or shrine. These 
last were of extremely light construction, and were 
made to fit rapidly one to another. The canopy 
was probably a travelling one, carried in the king’s 
train wherever he went, and set up at a moment’s 
notice to shield him from the sun. 

The rest of the south wall and the whole of the 
east, as far as the entrance doorway, were taken 
up by the parts of no fewer than four chariots. As 





Plate XXV 




A Survey of the Antechamber 


the photograph shows, they were heaped together in 
terrible confusion, the plunderers having evidently 
turned them this way and that, in their endeavours 
to secure the more valuable portions of the gold 
decoration which covered them. Theirs not the 
whole responsibility, however. The entrance passage 
was far too narrow to admit the ingress of complete 
chariots, so, to enable them to get into the chamber, 
the axles were deliberately sawn in two, the wheels 
dismounted and piled together, and the dismembered 
bodies placed by themselves. 

In the re-assembling and restoration of these 
chariots we have a prodigious task ahead of us, but 
the results will be gorgeous enough to justify any 
amount of time that is bestowed upon them. From 
top to bottom they are covered with gold, every 
inch of which is decorated, either with embossed 
patterns and scenes upon the gold itself, or with 
inlaid designs in coloured glass and stone. The 
actual woodwork of the chariots is in good condition 
and needs but little treatment, but with the horse- 
trappings and other leather parts it is quite another 
story, the untanned leather having been affected by 
the damp and turned into a black, unpleasant-looking 
glue. Fortunately these leather parts were, in almost 
every instance, plated with gold, and from this gold, 
which is well preserved, we hope to be able to make 
a reconstruction of the harness. Mixed with the 
chariot parts there were a number of miscellaneous 
smaller objects, including alabaster jars, more sticks 
and bows, bead sandals, baskets, and a set of four 
horsehair fly-whisks, with lion-head handles of gilded 
wood. 

We have now made a complete tour of the Ante- 

j iai 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 

chamber — a fairly comprehensive one, it seemed — 
and yet we find, by reference to our notes, that out 
of some six or seven hundred objects which it con- 
tained we have mentioned a scant hundred. Nothing 
but a complete catalogue, transcribed from our 
register cards, would give an adequate idea of the 
extent of the discovery, and in the present volume 
that is naturally out of the question. We must con- 
fine ourselves here to a more or less summary descrip- 
tion of the principal finds, and reserve a detailed study 
of the objects for later publications. It would be 
impossible, in any case, to attempt such an account 
at the present moment, for there are months, possibly 
years, of reconstructive work ahead of us, if the 
material is to be treated as it deserves. We must 
remember, too, that we have dealt so far with but 
a single chamber. There are inner chambers still 
untouched, and we hope to find among their contents 
treasures far surpassing those with which the present 
volume is concerned. 


122 




CHAPTER VIII 
Clearing the Antechamber 

C LEARING the objects from the Antechamber 
was like playing a gigantic game of spillikins. 
So crowded were they that it was a matter 
of extreme difficulty to move one without running 
serious risk of damaging others, and in some cases 
they were so inextricably tangled that an elaborate 
system of props and supports had to be devised to 
hold one object or group of objects in place while 
another was being removed ( see Plate XXVI). At such 
times life was a nightmare. One was afraid to move 
lest one should kick against a prop and bring the whole 
thing crashing down. Nor, in many cases, could one 
tell without experiment whether a particular object 
was strong enough to bear its own weight. Certain 
of the things were in beautiful condition, as strong 
as when they first were made, but others were in a 
most precarious state, and the problem constantly 
arose whether it would be better to apply preserva- 
tive treatment to an object in situ , or to wait until 
it could be dealt with in more convenient surround- 
ings in the laboratory. The latter course was 
adopted whenever possible, but there were cases in 
which the removal of an object without treatment 
would have meant almost certain destruction. 

There were sandals, for instance, of patterned 
bead-work, of which the threading had entirely rotted 
away. As they lay on the floor of the chamber they 

133 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


looked in perfectly sound condition, but, try to pick 
one up, and it crumbled at the touch, and all you 
had for your pains was a handful of loose, meaning- 
less beads. This was a clear case for treatment on 
the spot — a spirit stove, some paraffin wax, an hour 
or two to harden, and the sandal could be removed 
intact, and handled with the utmost freedom. The 
funerary bouquets again {see Plate XXVII) : without 
treatment as they stood they would have ceased to 
exist ; subjected to three or four sprayings of celluloid 
solution they bore removal well, and were subsequently 
packed with scarcely any injury. Occasionally, par- 
ticularly with the larger objects, it was found better 
to apply local treatment in the tomb, just sufficient to 
ensure a safe removal to the laboratory, where more 
drastic measures were possible. Each object pre- 
sented a separate problem, and, as I said before, 
there were cases in which only experiment could 
show what the proper treatment was to be. 

It was slow work, painfully slow, and nerve- 
racking at that, for one felt all the time a heavy 
weight of responsibility. Every excavator must, if 
he have any archaeological conscience at all. The 
things he finds are not his own property, to treat 
as he pleases, or neglect as he chooses. They are a 
direct legacy from the past to the present age, he 
but the privileged intermediary through whose hands 
they come ; and if, by carelessness, slackness, or 
ignorance, he lessens the sum of knowledge that 
might have been obtained from them, he knows him- 
self to be guilty of an archaeological crime of the 
first magnitude. Destruction of evidence is so pain- 
fully easy, and yet so hopelessly irreparable. Tired 
or pressed for time, you shirk a tedious piece of 

i* 4 








Clearing the Antechamber 


cleaning, or do it in a half-hearted, perfunctory sort of 
way, and you will perhaps have thrown away the 
one chance that will ever occur of gaining some 
important piece of knowledge. 

Too many people — unfortunately there are so- 
called archaeologists among them — are apparently 
under the impression that the object bought from a 
dealer’s shop is just as valuable as one which has 
been found in actual excavation, and that until the 
object in question has been cleaned, entered in the 
books, marked with an accession number, and placed 
in a tidy museum case, it is not a proper subject for 
study at all. There was never a greater mistake. 
Field-work is all-important, and it is a sure and 
certain fact that if every excavation had been pro- 
perly, systematically, and conscientiously carried 
out, our knowledge of Egyptian archaeology would 
be at least 50 per cent, greater than it is. There are 
numberless derelict objects in the storerooms of our 
museums which would give us valuable information 
could they but tell us whence they came, and box 
after box full of fragments which a few notes at the 
time of finding would have rendered capable of 
reconstruction. 

Granting, then, that a heavy weight of responsi- 
bility must at all times rest upon the excavator, our 
own feelings on this occasion will easily be realized. 
It had been our privilege to find the most important 
collection of Egyptian antiquities that had ever seen 
the light, and it was for us to show that we were 
worthy of the trust. So many things there were that 
might go wrong. Danger of theft, for instance, was 
an ever-present anxiety. The whole countryside was 
agog with excitement about the tomb ; all sorts of 

125 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


extravagant tales were current about the gold and 
jewels it contained ; and, as past experience had 
shown, it was only too possible that there might be 
a serious attempt to raid the tomb by night. This 
possibility of robbery on a large scale was negatived, 
so far as was humanly possible, by a complicated 
system of guarding, there being present in The 
Valley, day and night, three independent groups oi 
watchmen, each answerable to a different authority 
— the Government Antiquities Guards, a squad oi 
soldiers supplied by the Mudir of Kena, and a 
selected group of the most trustworthy of our own 
staff. In addition, we had a heavy wooden grille at 
the entrance to the passage, and a massive steel gate 
at the inner doorway, each secured by four pad- 
locked chains ; and, that there might never be any 
mistake about these latter, the keys were in the 
permanent charge of one particular member of the 
European staff, who never parted with them for a 
moment, even to lend them to a colleague. Petty 
or casual theft we guarded against by doing all the 
handling of the objects ourselves. 

Another and perhaps an even greater cause for 
anxiety was the condition of many of the objects, 
It was manifest with some of them that their very 
existence depended on careful manipulation and 
correct preservative treatment, and there were 
moments when our hearts were in our mouths. 
There were other worries, too — visitors, for instance, 
but I shall have quite a little to say about them 
later — and I fear that by the time the Antechamber 
was finished our nerves, to say nothing of our tempers, 
were in an extremely ragged state. But here am I 
talking about finishing before we have even begun. 






Clearing the Antechamber 


We must make a fresh start. It is not time to lose 
our tempers yet. 

Obviously, our first and greatest need was photo- 
graphy. Before anything else was done, or anything 
moved, we must have a series of preliminary views, 
taken in panorama, to show the general appearance 
of the chamber. For lighting we had available two 
movable electric standards, giving 3,000 candle- 
power, and it was with these that all the photo- 
graphic work in the tomb was done. Exposures were 
naturally rather slow, but the light was beautifully 
even, much more so than would have been afforded 
by flashlight — a dangerous process in such a crowded 
chamber — or reflected sunlight, which were the two 
possible alternatives. Fortunately for us, there was 
an uninscribed and empty tomb close by — the Davis 
cache tomb of Akh'en'Aten. This we got permission 
from the Government to use as a dark room, and 
here Burton established himself. It was not too con- 
venient in some ways, but it was worth while putting 
up with a little inconvenience to have a dark room 
so close, for in the case of experimental exposures he 
could slip across and develop without moving his 
camera out of position. Moreover, these periodic 
dashes of his from tomb to tomb must have been a 
godsend to the crowd of curious visitors who kept 
vigil above the tomb, for there were many days 
during the winter in which it was the only excitement 
they had. 

Our next step, after these preliminary photo- 
graphs had been taken, was to devise an efficient 
method of registering the contents of the chamber, 
for it would be absolutely essential, later on, that 
we should have a ready means of ascertaining the 

137 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh'Amen 


exact part of the tomb from which any particular 
object might have come. Naturally, each object, or 
closely allied group of objects, would be given its 
own catalogue number, and would have that number 
securely attached to it when it was moved away from 
the chamber, but that was not enough, for the num- 
ber might not indicate position. So far as possible, 
the numbers were to follow a definite order, begin- 
ning at the entrance doorway and working system- 
atically round the chamber, but it was very certain 
that many objects now hidden would be found in the 
course of clearing, and have to be numbered out of 
turn. We got over the difficulty by placing printed 
numbers on every object and photographing them 
in small groups. Every number showed in at least 
one of the photographs, so that, by duplicating 
prints, we were able to place with the notes of every 
single object in our filing cabinets a print which 
showed at a glance its actual position in the tomb. 

So far, so good, as far as the internal work in the 
tomb was concerned. Outside it, we had a still more 
difficult problem to solve, that of finding adequate 
working and storage space for the objects as they 
were removed. Three things were absolutely essen- 
tial. In the first place we must have plenty of room. 
There would be boxes to unpack, notes and measure- 
ments to be taken, repairs to be carried out, experi- 
ments with various preservative materials to be made, 
and obviously we should require considerable table 
accommodation as well as ordinary storage space. 
Then, secondly, we must have a place that we could 
render thief-proof, for, as things were moved, the 
laboratory would come to be almost as great a source 
of danger as the tomb itself. Lastly, we must have 

128 




Clearing the Antechamber 


seclusion. This may seem a less obvious need than 
the others, but we foresaw, and the winter’s happen- 
ings proved us to be right, that unless we were out 
of sight of visitors’ ordinary haunts we should be 
treated as a side-show, and should be unable to get 
any work done at all. Eventually we solved the 
problem by getting permission from the Government 
to take over the tomb of Seti II (No. 15 in The Valley 
catalogue). This certainly fulfilled the third of our 
requirements. It is not a tomb ordinarily visited by 
tourists, and its position, tucked away in a corner 
at the extreme end of The Valley, was exactly suit- 
able to our purpose. No other tomb lay beyond it, 
so, without causing inconvenience to anyone, we 
could close to ordinary traffic the path that led to 
it, and thus secure complete privacy for ourselves. 

It had other advantages, too. For one thing, it 
was so well sheltered by overhanging cliffs that at 
no time of day did the sun ever penetrate its doors, 
thus remaining comparatively cool even in the hottest 
of summer weather. There was also a considerable 
amount of open space in front of it, and this we 
utilized later as an open-air photographic studio and 
a carpenter’s shop. We were somewhat restricted as 
to space, for the tomb was so long and narrow that 
all our work had to be done at the upper end of it, 
the lower part being useless except for storage pur- 
poses. It had also the disadvantage of being rather 
a long way from the scene of operations. These, how- 
ever, were but minor drawbacks compared with the 
positive advantages which the tomb offered. We had 
a reasonable amount of room, we had privacy, and 
safety we ensured by putting up a many-padlocked 
steel gate, one and a half tons in weight. 

iag 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


One other point with regard to the laboratory 
work the reader should bear in mind. We were five 
hundred miles from anywhere, and, if we ran short 
of preservative materials, there might be consider- 
able delay before we could secure a fresh supply. 
The Cairo shops furnished most of our needs, but 
there were certain chemicals of which we exhausted 
the entire Cairo stock before the winter was over, 
and other things which, in the first instance, could 
only be procured in England. Constant care and 
forethought were therefore necessary to prevent 
shortage and the consequent holding up of the work. 

By December 27th all our preparations were made, 
and we were ready to make a start on the actual 
removal of the objects. We worked on a regular 
system of division of labour. Burton came first with 
his photographs of the numbered groups of objects ; 
Hall and Hauser followed with their scale plan of 
the chamber, every object being drawn on the plan 
in projection ; Callender and I did the preliminary 
noting and clearing, and superintended the removal 
of the objects to the laboratory ; and there Mace and 
Lucas received them, and were responsible for the 
detail-noting, mending, and preservation. 

The first object to be removed was the painted 
wooden casket. Then, working from north to south, 
and thus putting off the evil day when we should 
have to tackle the complicated tangle of chariots, 
we gradually disencumbered the great animal couches 
of the objects which surrounded them. Each object 
as it was removed was placed upon a padded wooden 
stretcher and securely fastened to it with bandages. 
Enormous numbers of these stretchers were required, 
for, to avoid double handling, they were in almost 




Clearing the Antechamber 


every case left permanently with the object, and 
not re-used. From time to time, when a sufficient 
number of stretchers had been filled — about once a 
day, on an average — a convoy was made up and 
dispatched under guard to the laboratory. This was 
the moment for which the crowd of watchers above 
the tomb were waiting. Out came the reporters’ 
note-books, click, click, click went the cameras in 
every direction, and a lane had to be cleared for the 
procession to pass through. I suppose more films 
were wasted in The Valley last winter than in any 
other corresponding period of time since cameras 
were first invented. We in the laboratory had occa- 
sion once for a piece of old mummy cloth for experi- 
mental purposes ; it was sent up to us in a stretcher, 
and it was photographed eight times before it got 
to us ! 

The removal and transport of the smaller objects 
was a comparatively simple matter, but it was quite 
otherwise when it came to the animal couches and 
the chariots. Each of the former was constructed 
in four pieces — the two animal sides, the bed proper, 
and the base to which the animals’ feet were socketed* 
They were manifestly much too large to negotiate 
the narrow entrance passage, and must have been 
brought into the tomb in sections and assembled 
there. Indeed, strips of newer gold round the joints 
show where the damage they had incurred in hand- 
ling had been made good after deposition. It waa 
obvious that to get the couches out of the tomb we 
must take them apart again ; no easy matter, for 
after three thousand years the bronze hooks had 
naturally set tight in the staples, and would not 
budge. We got them apart eventually, and with 

131 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


scarcely any damage, but it took no fewer than five 
of us to do it. Two supported the central part of 
the couch, two were responsible for the well-being of 
the animals, while the fifth, working from underneath, 
eased up the hooks, one after the other, with a lever. 

Even when taken apart there was none too much 
room to get the side animals through the passage, 
and they needed very careful handling. However, 
we got them all out without accident, and packed 
them straight into boxes we had in readiness for 
them just outside the entrance to the tomb. 

Most difficult of all to move were the chariots, 
which had suffered considerably from the treatment 
to which they had been subjected. It had not been 
possible to get them into the tomb whole in the first 
instance, for they were too wide for the entrance 
passage, and the wheels had had to be removed and 
the axles sawn off at one end. They had evidently 
been moved out of position and turned upside down 
by the plunderers, and in the subsequent tidying up 
the parts had been loosely stacked one upon another. 
Egyptian chariots are of very light construction, and 
the rough usage which they had undergone made 
these extremely difficult to handle. There was another 
complication, in that the parts of the harness were 
made of undressed leather. Now this, if exposed to 
humidity, speedily resolves itself into glue, and that 
was what had happened here — the black glutinous 
mass which represented the trappings having run 
down over everything and dropped, not only on the 
other parts of the chariots themselves, but upon 
other objects which had nothing to do with them. 
Thus the leather has almost entirely perished, but, 
fortunately, as I have already stated, we have for 





IIIAXX a-iv'M 



Clearing the Antechamber 


reconstructional purposes the gold ornamentation 
with which it was covered. 

Seven weeks in all it took us to clear the Ante- 
chamber, and thankful indeed were we when it was 
finished, and that without any kind of disaster be- 
falling us. One scare we had. For two or three 
days the sky was very black, and it looked as though 
we were in for one of the heavy storms that occa- 
sionally visit Thebes. On such occasions rain comes 
down in torrents, and if the storm persists for any 
length of time the whole bed of The Valley becomes 
a raging flood. No power on earth could have kept 
our tomb from being flooded under these conditions, 
but, fortunately, though there must have been heavy 
rain somewhere in the district, we escaped with but 
a few drops. Certain correspondents indulged in 
some highly imaginative writing on the subject of 
this threatened storm. As a result of this and other 
distorted news we received a somewhat cryptic cable, 
sent presumably by a zealous student of the occult. 
It ran : “ In the case of further trouble, pour milk, 
wine and honey on the threshold.” Unfortunately, 
we had neither wine nor honey with us, so were 
unable to carry out the directions. In spite of our 
negligence, however, we escaped the further trouble. 
Perhaps we were given absent treatment. 

In the course of our clearing we naturally accumu- 
lated a good deal of evidence with regard to the 
activities of the original tomb-plunderers, and this 
will be as good a place as any to give a statement 
of the conclusions at which we arrived. 

In the first place, we know from the sealings on 
the outer doorway that all the plundering was done 
within a very few years of the king’s burial. We 

133 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


also know that the plunderers entered the tomb at 
least twice. There were broken scattered objects 
on the floor of the entrance passage and staircase, 
proving that at the time of the first attempt the 
passage-way between the inner and the outer sealed 
doors was empty. It is, I suppose, just possible that 
this preliminary plundering was done immediately 
after the funeral ceremonies. Thereafter the passage 
was entirely filled with stones and rubbish, and it 
was through a tunnel excavated in the upper left- 
hand corner of this filling that the subsequent at- 
tempts were made. At this final attempt the thieves 
had penetrated into all the chambers of the tomb, 
but their tunnel was only a narrow one, and clearly 
they could not have got away with any except the 
smaller objects. 

Now as to internal evidence of the damage they 
had been able to effect. To begin with, there was 
a strange difference between the respective states in 
which the Antechamber and the Annexe had been 
left. In the latter, as we have described in the 
preceding chapter, everything was in confusion, and 
there was not a vacant inch of floor-space. It was 
quite evident that the plunderers had turned every- 
thing topsy-turvy, and that the present state of the 
chamber was precisely that in which they had left 
it. The Antechamber was quite different. There was 
a certain amount of confusion, it was true, but it 
was orderly confusion, and had it not been for the 
evidence of plundering afforded by the tunnel and 
the re-sealed doorways, one might have imagined at 
first view that there never had been any plundering, 
and that the confusion was due to Oriental careless- 
ness at the time of the funeral. 


134 




Clearing the Antechamber 


However, when we commenced clearing, it quickly 
became manifest that this comparative orderliness 
was due to a process of hasty tidying-up, and that 
the plunderers had been just as busy here as they 
had in the Annexe. Parts of the same object were 
found in different quarters of the chamber ; objects 
that should have been in boxes were lying on the 
floor or upon the couches ; on the lid of one of the 
boxes there was a collar, intact but crumpled ; be- 
hind the chariots, in an entirely inaccessible place, 
there was a box-lid, the box to which it belonged 
being far away, near the innermost door. Quite 
clearly the plunderers had scattered things here just 
as they had done in the Annexe, and someone had 
come after them and rearranged the chamber. 

Later, when we came to unpack the boxes, we 
found still more circumstantial evidence. One, the 
long white box at the north end of the chamber, was 
half full of sticks, bows and arrows, and above, 
stuffed tightly in upon them, there was a mixed 
collection of the king’s under-linen. Yet the metal 
points had been broken from all the arrows, and a 
few were found dropped upon the floor. Other 
sticks and bows that obviously belonged to this box 
were likewise scattered in the chamber. In another 
box there were a number of decorated robes, bundled 
together and thrust in anyhow, and mixed with them 
several pairs of sandals. So tightly had the contents 
of the box been stuffed, that the metal toe-thong of 
one of the sandals had pierced right through its own 
leather sole and penetrated that of another which 
lay beneath it. In still another box, jewellery and 
tiny statuettes had been packed on top of faience 
libation vases. Others, again, were half empty, or 

i3S 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


contained a mere jumble of odds and ends of 
cloth. 

There was, moreover, certain evidence that this 
confusion was due to hasty repacking, and had 
nothing to do with the original arrangement of the 
boxes, for on the lids of several there were neat little 
dockets stating clearly what the contents should 
have been, and in only one case did the docket bear 
any sort of relation to the contents as they actually 
were. This particular docket called for “ 17 (un- 
known objects) of lapis lazuli colour.” Within the 
box there were sixteen libation vases of dark blue 
faience, and a seventeenth was on the floor of the 
chamber some distance away. Eventually, in our 
final study of the material these dockets will be of 
great value. We shall be able, in a great many cases, 
to apportion out the objects to the boxes which 
originally contained them, and shall know exactly 
what is missing. 

The best evidence of all was supplied by a very 
elaborate garment of faience, gold and inlay, com- . 
prising in one piece corslet, collar and pectoral. The 
largest portion of it was found in the box which 
contained the faience vases just mentioned ; the 
pectoral and most of the collar were tucked away 
in the small gold shrine ; and isolated pieces of it 
turned up in several other boxes, and were scattered 
all over the floor. There is nothing at present to 
show which of the boxes it originally belonged to, or 
even that it actually belonged to any of them. It 
is quite possible that the plunderers brought it from 
the innermost chamber to the better light of the Ante- 
chamber, and there deliberately pulled it to pieces. 

From the facts at our disposal we can now re- 

136 






j 



PLATE XXIX 

PEDESTAL OK MISSING STATUETTE IN THE SMALL GOLDEN SHRINE. 



Clearing the Antechamber 


construct the whole sequence of events. A breach 
was first made in the upper left-hand corner of the 
first sealed door, just large enough to admit a man, 
and then the tunnelling began, the excavators work- 
ing in a chain, passing the stones and baskets of 
earth back from one to another. Seven or eight 
hours’ work might suffice to bring them to the 
second sealed door; a hole in this, and they were 
through. Then in the semi-darkness began a mad 
scramble for loot. Gold was their natural quarry, 
but it had to be in portable form, and it must have 
maddened them to see it glinting all around them, 
on plated objects which they could not move, and 
had not time to strip. Nor, in the dim light in 
which they were working, could they always distin- 
guish between the real and the false, and many an 
object which they took for solid gold was found on 
closer examination to be but gilded wood, and was 
contemptuously thrown aside. The boxes were 
treated in very drastic fashion. Without exception 
they were dragged out into the centre of the room 
and ransacked, their contents being strewn about all 
over the floor. What valuables they found in them 
and made away with we may never know, but their 
search can have been but hurried and superficial, 
for many objects of solid gold were overlooked. One 
very valuable thing we know they did secure. Within 
the small gold shrine there was a pedestal of gilded 
wood, made for a statuette, with the imprint of the 
statuette’s feet still marked upon it (Plate XXIX). 
The statuette itself was gone, and there can be very 
little doubt that it was a solid gold one, probably 
very similar to the gold statuette of Thothmes III, 
in the image of Amen, in the Carnarvon collection. 
k 137 




The Tomb of Tut-arikh-Amen 


Next, the Antechamber having been thoroughly 
worked over, the thieves turned their attention to the 
Annexe, knocking a hole in its doorway just big 
enough to let them through, and overturning and 
ransacking its contents quite as thoroughly as they 
had done those of the outer chamber. 

Then, and apparently not until then, they directed 
themselves towards the burial chamber, and made a 
very small hole in the sealed doorway which screened 
it from the Antechamber. How much damage they 
did there we shall know in due time, but, so far as 
we can tell at present, it was less than in the outer 
chambers. They may, indeed, have been disturbed 
at this particular stage in the proceedings, and there 
is a very interesting little piece of evidence that 
seems to bear the theory out. 

It may be remembered that in our description of 
the objects in the Antechamber (Chapter VII) we 
mentioned that one of the boxes contained a handful 
of solid gold rings tied up in a fold of cloth. They 
were just the things to attract a thief, for their 
intrinsic value was considerable, and yet they could 
very easily be hidden away. Now, every visitor to 
Egypt will remember that if you give money to a 
fellah his ordinary proceeding will be to undo a por- 
tion of his head-shawl, put the coins in a fold of it, 
twist it round two or three times to hold the coins 
tight in place, and make it finally secure by looping 
the bag thus formed into a knot. These rings had 
been secured in exactly the same way — the same 
loose fold in the cloth, the same twisting round to 
form the bag, and the same loose knot. This, un- 
questionably, was the work of one of the thieves. 
It was not his head-shawl that he had used — the 

*38 






Clearing the Antechamber 


fellah of the period wore no such garment — but one 
of the king’s scarves which he had picked up in the 
tomb, and he had fastened them thus for convenience 
in carrying (Plate XXX). How comes it then that the 
precious bundle of rings was left in the tomb, and not 
carried off ? It was the very last thing that a thief 
would be likely to forget, and, in case of sudden alarm, 
it was not heavy enough to impede his flight, however 
hurried that might be. We are almost forced to 
the conclusion that the thieves were either trapped 
within the tomb, or overtaken in their flight — traced, 
in any case, with some of the plunder still upon them. 
If this be so, it explains the presence of certain 
other pieces of jewellery and gold-work too valuable 
to leave and too big to overlook. 

In any case, the fact that a robbery had been 
committed got to the ears of the officials concerned, 
and they came to the tomb to investigate and make 
the damage good. For some reason they seem to 
have been in almost as great a hurry as the thieves, 
and their work of reparation was sadly scamped. 
The Annexe they left severely alone, not even taking 
the trouble to fill up the hole in the doorway. In 
the Antechamber the smaller objects with which the 
floor was covered were swept up, bundled together, 
and jammed — there is no other word — back into the 
boxes, no attempt being made to sort the material, 
or to put the objects into the boxes which had been 
originally intended for them. Some of the boxes 
were packed tight, others were left almost empty, 
and on one of the couches there were deposited two 
large bundles of cloth in which a miscellaneous col- 
lection of material had been wrapped. Nor even 
was all the small material gathered up. The sticks, 

139 




The Tomb of Tut ankh-Amen 


bows and arrows were left in scattered groups ; on 
the lid of a box were thrown a crumpled collar of 
pendants, and a pad of faience rings ; and on the 
floor, one on one side of the chamber and one on 
the other, there was a pair of fragile bead-work 
sandals. The larger objects were pushed carelessly 
back against the walls, or stacked one upon another. 
Certainly no respect was shown, either to the objects 
themselves, or to the king whose property they were, 
and one wonders why, if they tidied up so badly, 
they took the trouble to tidy up at all. One thing 
we must credit them with. They did not do any 
pilfering, as they might easily have done, on their 
own account. We can be reasonably sure of that 
from the valuable objects, small and easily concealed, 
which they repacked into the boxes. 

The Antechamber finished — so far, at least, as 
they intended to finish it — the hole in the innermost 
doorway was refilled, plastered, and stamped with 
the royal necropolis seal. Then, retracing their steps, 
they closed and sealed the Antechamber door, filled 
up the plunderers’ tunnel through the passage- 
blocking, and made good the outer doorway. What 
further steps they took to prevent repetition of the 
crime we do not know, but probably they buried 
the whole entrance to the tomb deep out of sight. 
Better political conditions in the country might have 
prevented it for a time, but in the long run nothing 
but ignorance of its whereabouts could have saved 
it from further attempts at plundering; and very 
certain it is that, between the time of this re-closing 
and that of our discovery, no hand had touched the 
seals upon the door. 


140 




CHAPTER IX 
Visitors and the Press 


A RCHA50L0G Y under the limelight is a new and 
/% rather bewildering experience for most of us. 

■*» In the past we have gone about our business 
happily enough, intensely interested in it ourselves, 
but not expecting other folk to be more than tepidly 
polite about it, and now all of a sudden we find the 
world takes an interest in us, an interest so intense 
and so avid for details that special correspondents at 
large salaries have to be sent to interview us, report 
our every movement, and hide round corners to 
surprise a secret out of us. It is, as I said, a little 
bewildering for us, not to say embarrassing, and we 
wonder sometimes just exactly how and why it has 
all come about. We may wonder, but I think it 
would puzzle anyone to give an exact answer to 
the question. One must suppose that at the time 
the discovery was made the general public was in a 
state of profound boredom with news of reparations, 
conferences and mandates, and craved for some new 
topic of conversation. The idea of buried treasure, 
too, is one that appeals to most of us. Whatever the 
reason, or combination of reasons, it is quite certain 
that, once the initial Times dispatch had been pub- 
lished, no power on earth could shelter us from the 
light of publicity that beat down upon us. We were 
helpless, and had to make the best of it. 

The embarrassing side of it was soon brought 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


home to us in no uncertain manner. Telegrams 
poured in from every quarter of the globe. Within 
a week or two letters began to follow them, a deluge 
of correspondence that has persisted ever since. 
Amazing literature some of it. Beginning with letters 
of congratulation, it went on to offers of assist- 
ance, ranging all the way from tomb-planning to 
personal valeting ; requests for souvenirs — even a few 
grains of sand from above the tomb would be re- 
ceived so thankfully ; fantastic money offers, from 
moving-picture rights to copyright on fashions of 
dress ; advice on the preservation of antiquities, and 
the best method of appeasing evil spirits and ele- 
mentals ; press clippings ; tracts ; would-be facetious 
communications; stern denunciations of sacrilege; 
claims of relationship — surely you must be the cousin 
who lived in Camberwell in 1893, and whom we have 
never heard of since ; and so on and so on. Fatuous 
communications of this sort came tumbling in upon 
us at the rate of ten or fifteen a day right through 
the winter. There is a whole sackful of them, and 
an interesting psychological study they would make 
if one had the time to give to them. What, for 
instance, is one to make of a person who solemnly 
inquires whether the discovery of the tomb throws 
any light on the alleged Belgian atrocities in the 
Congo ? 

Next came our friends the newspaper corre- 
spondents, who flocked to The Valley in large numbers 
and devoted all their social gifts — and they were 
considerable — towards dispelling any lingering re- 
mains of loneliness or desert boredom that we mig ht 
still have left to us. They certainly did their work 
with some thoroughness, for each owed it to him- 

M* 





Plati: XXXI 


VISITORS ABOVE THE TOMB 




Visitors and the Press 


self and to his paper to get daily information, and we 
in Egypt were delighted when we heard Lord Car- 
narvon’s decision to place the whole matter of 
publicity in the hands of The Times. 

Another, and perhaps the most serious of all the 
embarrassments that notoriety brought upon us, was 
the fatal attraction the tomb had for visitors. It 
was not that we wanted to be secretive, or had any 
objection to visitors as such — as a matter of fact, 
there are few things more pleasant than showing 
one’s work to appreciative people — but as the situa- 
tion developed it became very clear that, unless 
something was done to discourage it, we should spend 
the entire season playing showmen, and never get 
any work done at all. It was surely a new chapter 
in the history of The Valley. Tourist visitors it had 
always known, but heretofore it had been a business 
proceeding and not a garden party. Armed with 
guide-books, they had conscientiously visited as many 
tombs as time, or their dragoman, would allow them, 
bustled through their lunch, and been hurried off to 
a further debauch of sight-seeing elsewhere. 

This winter, dragoman and time schedules were 
disregarded alike, and many of the ordinary sights 
were left unvisited. The tomb drew like a magnet. 
From a very early hour in the morning the pilgrimage 
began. Visitors arrived on donkeys, in sand-carts, 
and in two-horse cabs, and proceeded to make them- 
selves at home in The Valley for the day. Round 
the top of the upper level of the tomb there was a 
low wall, and here they each staked out a claim and 
established themselves, waiting for something to 
happen. Sometimes it did, more often it did not, 
but it seemed to make no difference to their patience. 

M3 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


There they would sit the whole morning, reading, 
talking, knitting, photographing the tomb and each 
other, quite satisfied if at the end they could get a 
glimpse of anything. Great was the excitement, 
always, when word was passed up that something 
was to be brought out of the tomb. Books and 
knitting were thrown aside, and the whole battery 
of cameras was cleared for action and directed at 
the entrance passage. We were really alarmed some- 
times lest the whole wall should give way, and a 
crowd of visitors be precipitated into the mouth of 
the tomb. From above, it must really have been 
an imposing spectacle to see strange objects like the 
great gilt animals from the couches emerging gradu- 
ally from the darkness into the light of day. We 
who were bringing them up were much too anxious 
about their safety in the narrow passage to think 
about such things ourselves, but a preliminary gasp 
and then a quick buzz of exclamations brought home 
to us the effect it had upon the watchers above. 

To these, the casual visitors who contented them- 
selves with watching from the top, there could be 
no objection, and, whenever possible, we brought 
things out of the tomb without covers for their 
special benefit. Our real embarrassment was caused 
by the numbers of people who, for one reason or 
another, had to be shown over the tomb itself. This 
was a difficulty 'that came upon us so gradually and 
insidiously that for a long time we none of us realized 
what the inevitable result must be, but in the end 
it brought the work practically to a standstill. At 
the beginning we had, of course, the formal inspec- 
tions of the departmental officials concerned. These, 
naturally, we welcomed. In the same way we were 

*44 




Plate XXXII 




Visitors and the Press 


always glad to receive other archaeologists. They had 
a right to visit the tomb, and we were delighted 
to show them everything there was to be seen. 
So far there was no difficulty, and there never would 
be any difficulty. It was with the letters of intro- 
duction that the trouble began. They were written, 
literally in hundreds, by our friends — we never 
realized before how many we had — by our friends’ 
friends, by people who had a real claim upon us, 
and by people who had less than none; for diplo- 
matic reasons, by Ministers or departmental officials 
in Cairo ; to say nothing of self- written introductions, 
which either bluntly demanded admittance to the 
tomb or showed quite clearly and ingeniously how 
unreasonable it would be to refuse them. One in- 
genious person even intercepted a telegraph boy, and 
tried to make the delivery of the message an excuse 
for getting in. The desire to visit the tomb became 
an obsession with the tourist, and in the Luxor 
hotels the question of ways and means became a 
regular topic of conversation. Those who had seen 
the tomb boasted of the fact openly, and to many 
of those who had net it became a matter of personal 
pride to effect an introduction somehow. To such 
lengths were things carried that certain tourist 
agencies in America actually advertised a trip to 
Egypt to see the tomb. 

All this, as may be imagined, put us in a very 
awkward position. There were certain visitors whom 
for diplomatic reasons we had to admit, and others 
whom we could not refuse without giving serious 
offence, not only to themselves, but to the third 
parties whose introduction they brought. Where 
were we to draw the line ? Obviously something had 

*45 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


to be done, for, as I said, the whole of the work in 
the tomb was being rapidly brought to a standstill. 
Eventually we solved the difficulty by running away. 
Ten days after the opening of the sealed door we 
filled up the tomb, locked and barred the laboratory, 
and disappeared for a week. This made a complete 
break. When we resumed work the tomb itself was 
irrevocably buried, and we made it a fixed rule that 
no visits were to be made to the laboratory at all. 

Now this whole question of visitors is a matter 
of some delicacy. We have already got into a good 
deal of hot water over it, and have been accused of 
lack of consideration, ill manners, selfishness, boorish- 
ness, and quite a number of other things ; so perhaps 
it would be as well to make a clear statement of the 
difficulties involved. These are two. In the first 
place, the presence of a number of visitors creates 
serious danger to the objects themselves, danger that 
we, who are responsible for them, have no right to 
Jet them undergo. How could it be otherwise ? The 
tomb is small and crowded, and sooner or later — it 
actually happened more than once last year — a false 
step or hasty movement on the part of a visitor 
will do some piece of absolutely irreparable damage. 
It is not the fault of the visitor, for he does not 
and cannot know the exact position or condition 
of every object. It is our fault, for letting him be 
there. The unfortunate part of it is that the more 
interested and the more enthusiastic the visitor is, 
the more likely he is to be the cause of damage : 
he gets excited, and in his enthusiasm over one 
object he is very liable to step back into or knock 
against another. Even if no actual damage is caused, 
the passage of large parties of visitors through the 

146 




Visitors and the Press 


tomb stirs up the dust, and that in itself is bad for 
the objects. 

That is the first and obvious danger. The second, 
due to the loss of actual working time that visitors 
cause, is not so immediately apparent, but it is in 
some ways even more serious. This will seem a 
terribly exaggerated view to the individual visitor, 
who will wonder what difference the half-hour that 
he or she consumed could make to the whole season’s 
work. Perfectly true, so far as that particular half- 
hour is concerned, but what of the other nine visitors, 
or groups of visitors, who come on the same day ? 
By strict arithmetic he and they have occupied five 
hours of our working day ; in actual fact, it is con- 
siderably more than five, for in the short intervals 
between visitors it is impossible to settle down to 
any serious piece of work. To all intents and pur- 
poses a complete day has been lost. Now, there were 
many days last season in which we actually did 
have ten parties of visitors, and if we had given 
way to every demand, and avoided any possibility 
of giving offence, there would not have been a day 
in which we did not far exceed the ten. In other 
words, there would have been whole weeks at a 
time in which no work was done at all. As it actually 
worked out last winter, we gave visitors a quarter 
of our working season. This resulted in our having 
to prolong our work into the hot weather a whole 
month longer than we had intended, and the heat 
of The Valley in May is not a thing to look forward 
to with equanimity, and is anything but inducive to 
good work. 

There was much more at stake, however, than 
our own personal inconvenience : there was actual 

>47 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


danger for the objects themselves. Delicate anti- 
quities are extremely sensitive to any change of 
temperature, and have to be watched most carefully. 
In the present case the change from the close atmo- 
sphere of the Antechamber to the variable tempera- 
ture outside, and the dry airiness of the tomb we 
used as a laboratory, was a very appreciable one, 
and certain of the objects were affected by it. It 
was extremely important that preservatives should 
be applied at the very first possible moment, and 
in some cases there was need of experimental treat- 
ment which had to be watched very carefully. The 
danger of constant interruption is obvious, and I 
need not labour the point. What would a chemist 
think if you asked him to break off a delicate experi- 
ment to show you round his laboratory ? What 
would be the feelings of a surgeon if you interrupted 
him in the middle of an operation ? And what about 
the patient ? For the matter of that, what would 
a business man say — what wouldn’t he say ? — if he 
had a succession of ten parties of visitors in the 
course of the morning, each expecting to be shown 
all over the office ? 

Yet, surely, the claims of archaeology for consider- 
ation are just as great as those of any other form 
of scientific research, or even — dare I say it ? — of 
that of the sacred science of money-making itself. 
Why, because we carry on our work in unfrequented 
regions instead of in a crowded city, are we to be 
considered churlish for objecting to constant inter- 
ruptions ? I suppose the reason really is that in 
popular opinion archaeology is not work at all. Ex- 
cavation is a sort of super-tourist amusement, carried 
out with the excavator's own money if he is rich 

*48 







Visitors and the Press 


enough, or with other people’s money if he can per- 
suade them to subscribe it, and all he has to do is 
to enjoy life in a beautiful winter climate and pay 
a gang of natives to find things for him. It is the 
dilettante archaeologist, the man who rarely does any 
work with his own hands, but as often as not is 
absent when the actual discovery is made, who is 
largely responsible for this opinion. The serious 
excavator’s life is frequently monotonous and, as I 
hope to show in the next chapter, quite as hard- 
working as that of any other member of society. 

I have written more than I intended on this sub- 
ject, but really it is a very serious matter for us. 
We have an opportunity in this tomb such as no 
archeologists ever had before, but if we are to take 
full advantage of it — and failure to do so will earn 
for us the just execration of every future generation 
of archeologists — it is absolutely essential that we be 
left to carry on the work without interruption. It 
is not as if our visitors were all keen on archeology, 
or even mildly interested in it. Too many of them 
are attracted by mere curiosity, or, even worse, by 
a desire to visit the tomb because it is the thing 
to do. They want to be able to talk at large about 
it to their friends at home, or crow over less fortunate 
tourists who have not managed to secure an intro- 
duction themselves. Can you imagine anything more 
maddening, when you are completely absorbed in a 
difficult problem, than to give up half an hour of 
your precious time to a visitor who has pulled every 
conceivable kind of wire to gain admittance, and 
then to hear him say quite audibly as he goes away : 
“ Well, there wasn’t much to see, after all ” ? That 
actually happened last winter — and more than once. 

149 




The Tomb of Tutankh-Amen 


In the coming season there will in any case be 
much less for visitors to see. It will be absolutely 
impossible to get into the burial chamber, for every 
available inch of space will be occupied by scaffold- 
ing, and the removal of the shrine, section by section, 
will be much too ticklish an operation to admit of 
interruptions. In the laboratory we propose to deal 
with only one object at a time, which will be packed 
and got rid of as soon as we have finished with it. 
Six cases of objects from the tomb are already on 
exhibition in the Cairo Museum, and we would 
earnestly beg visitors to Egypt to content them- 
selves with these, and with what they can see from 
the outside of the tomb, and not to set their hearts 
on getting into the tomb itself. Those who are 
genuinely interested in archaeology for its ow r n sake 
will be the first to realize that the request is a reason- 
able one. The others, the idly curious, who look 
on the tomb as a side-show, and Tut ankh-Amen as 
a mere topic of conversation, have no rights in the 
matter, and need no consideration. Whatever our 
discoveries next season may be, we trust that we 
may be allowed to deal with them in a proper and 
dignified manner. 


«5o 




CHAPTER X 
Work in the Laboratory 

T HIS chapter is dedicated to those — and they 
are many — who think that an excavator spends 
his time basking in the sun, pleasantly ex- 
hilarated by watching other people work for him, 
and otherwise relieved from boredom by having 
baskets full of beautiful antiquities brought up from 
the bowels of the earth from time to time for him 
to look at. His actual life is very different, and, as 
there can be but few who know the details of it, 
it will be worth our while to give a general outline 
here before going into the question of the laboratory 
work of the past season. Incidentally, it will help 
to explain why this careful laboratory work was 
necessary. 

In the first place, it must be clearly understood 
that there is never any question of having basket- 
fuls of objects brought to the excavator for him 
to look at ; the first and most important rule in 
excavating is that the archaeologist must remove 
every antiquity from the ground with his own 
hands. So much depends upon it. Quite apart 
from the question of possible damage that might 
be caused by clumsy fingers, it is very essential that 
you see the object in situ, to gain any evidence 
you can from the position in which it lies, and the 
relationship it bears to objects near it. For example, 
there may very likely be dating evidence. How many 

151 



The Tomb of TuVankhAmen 


pieces there are in museums with vague “probably 
Middle Kingdom ” kind of labels, which, by refer- 
ence to the objects with which they were found, 
might easily have been assigned accurately to the 
Dynasty to which they belonged, or even to the 
reign of some particular king. There will, again, be 
evidence of arrangement to be secured, evidence that 
may show the use for which some particular object 
was made, or give the details for its ultimate 
reconstruction. 

Take, for instance, the tiny fragments of serrated 
flint which are found in such enormous quantities 
in town sites of the Middle Kingdom. We can guess 
their use, and with the label “ sickle flints ” they 
make not uninteresting museum material. Now find, 
as I have done, a complete sickle lying in the ground, 
its wooden parts in such condition that a touch will 
destroy the evidence of its ever having been a sickle 
at all. Two courses are open to you. By careful 
handling and the use of preservatives you may be 
able to get your sickle out of the ground intact, 
or, if it is too far gone for that, you can at least 
take the measurements and notes that will enable 
you to construct the wood anew. In either case 
you get a complete museum object, worth, archaeo- 
logically, a thousand times more than the handful 
of disconnected pieces of flint that you would other- 
wise have secured. This is a simple illustration of 
the importance of field evidence : we shall have 
other and more striking instances to record when 
we come to deal with the different classes of material. 

One other matter before we pass on. By noting 
the exact position of an object, or group of objects, 
you can not infrequently secure evidence that will 

15a 




Work in the Laboratory 


enable you to make a find of similar objects else- 
where. Foundation deposits are a case in point. In 
every construction the arrangement of the deposits 
followed a regular system, and, having found one, 
it is a simple matter to put your finger upon the 
others. 

An excavator, then, must see every object in 
position, must make careful notes before it is moved, 
and, if necessary, must apply preservative treatment 
on the spot. Obviously, under these conditions it 
is all-important for you to keep in close touch with 
your excavations. Holiday trips and days off are 
out of the question. While the work is actually 
running you must be on the spot all day, and avail- 
able at all hours of the day. Your workmen must 
know where to find you at any given moment, and 
must have a perfectly clear understanding that the 
news of a discovery must be passed on to you 
without any delay. 

In the case of an important discovery you will 
probably know something has happened before you 
actually get the report, for — in Egypt particularly — 
the news will have spread almost instantaneously, 
and have had a curious psychological effect upon 
your entire gang of workmen. They will be working 
differently, not necessarily harder, but differently, 
and much more silently. The ordinary work-songs 
will have ceased. A smaller discovery you will 
frequently sense in advance from the behaviour of 
the man who brings the message. Nothing would 
induce him to come straight to you and tell you 
openly what he has found. At all costs he must 
make a mystery of it, so he hovers about in a 
thoroughly self-conscious manner, thereby adver- 

l 153 




The Tomb of Tutankh-Amen 


fcising to the world at large exactly what has hap- 
pened, and eventually makes himself still more con- 
spicuous by beckoning you aside and whispering his 
news. Even then it will be difficult to get any but 
the vaguest of reports out of him, and it will prob- 
ably not be until you have reached the actual spot 
that you find out exactly what has been found. 
This is due largely to an Egyptian’s love of mystery 
for its own sake. The same man will tell his friends 
all about the find on the first opportunity, but it 
is part of the game to pretend that they must know 
nothing about it at the time. Partly, too, to excite- 
ment. Not that he takes any real interest in the 
objects themselves, but because he looks on them 
in the light of a gamble. Most excavators work on 
what is known as the baksheesh system : that is 
to say, they pay their workmen rewards, over and 
above their wages, for anything they find. It is not 
an ideal arrangement, but it has two advantages : 
it helps to ensure the safety of the objects, par- 
ticularly the small, easily concealed ones, which may 
be most valuable to you for dating purposes ; and 
it makes the men keener about their work, and 
more careful about the manner in which they carry 
it out, the reward being more for the safe handling 
than for the value of the object. 

For these, and for many other reasons which we 
could mention, it is all-important for you to keep 
close to your work, and, even if nothing is being 
found at the moment, you will not have much time 
to be idle. To begin with, every tomb, every build- 
ing, every broken Avail even, must be noted, and if 
you are dealing with pit-tombs this may involve 
considerable gymnastic exercise. The pits may range 

*54 


Work in the Laboratory 


anywhere from ten to a hundred and twenty feet 
in depth, and I calculated once that in the course 
of a single season I had climbed, hand over hand, 
up half a mile of rope. Then there is photography. 
Every object of any archaeological value must be 
photographed before it is moved, and in many cases 
a series of exposures must be made to mark the 
various stages in the clearing. Many of these photo- 
graphs will never be used, but you can never tell 
but that some question may arise, whereby a seem- 
ingly useless negative may become a record of 
the utmost value. Photography is absolutely essen- 
tial on every side, and it is perhaps the most exacting 
of all the duties that an excavator has to face. On 
a particular piece of work I have taken and developed 
as many as fifty negatives in a single day. 

Whenever possible, these particular branches of 
the work — surveying and photography — should be in 
the hands of separate experts. The man in charge 
will then have time to devote himself to what we 
may call the finer points of excavation. He will 
be able to play with his work, as a brother digger 
expressed it. In every excavation puzzles and prob- 
lems constantly present themselves, and it is only 
by going constantly over the ground, looking at it 
from every point of view, and scrutinizing it in every 
kind of light, that you will be able to arrive at a 
solution of some of these problems. The meaning 
of a complex of walls, the evidence of reconstruction 
of a building, or of a change in plan on the part of 
the original architect, the significance of a change 
of level, where the remains of a later period have 
been superimposed upon those of an earlier one, the 
purport of some peculiarity in the surface debris, 

i55 




The Tomb of Tut ankh-Amen 


or in the stratification of a mound — these and a 
score of others are the questions that an excavator 
has to face, and it is upon his ability to answer 
them that he will stand or fall as an archaeologist. 

Then, again, if he is freed from the labour of 
survey and photography, he will be able to devote 
more time and thought to the general organization 
of the work, and by that means to effect considerable 
economies both in time and money. Many a hun- 
dred pounds has been wasted by lack of system, and 
many an excavator has had to clear away his own 
dumps because he failed in the first instance to 
exercise a little forethought. The question of the 
distribution of the workmen is one that needs careful 
attention, and great wastage of labour can be avoided 
by moving men around from one place to another 
exactly when and where they are wanted, and never 
leaving more on a particular section of the work 
than are actually needed to keep it running smoothly. 
The number of labourers that an excavator can keep 
up with single-handed will depend naturally on the 
conditions of the work. On a big and more or less 
unproductive undertaking, such as pyramid clearing, 
he can look after an almost indefinite number. On 
rock-cut tombs he can perhaps keep pace with fifty ; 
whereas on shallow graves — a pre-dynastic cemetery, 
for example — ten will keep him uncomfortably busy. 
The number of men who can be employed is also 
largely dependent on the type of site and formation 
of the locality of the excavation. 

So much for the outdoor duties, the actual con- 
duct of his excavations. There are plenty of other 
jobs to be done, and his off hours and evenings will 
be very fully occupied if he is to keep on terms 

*56 




Work in the Laboratory 


with his work. His notes, his running plans, and the 
registration of the objects must be kept thoroughly 
up to date. There are the photographs to be 
developed, prints to be made, and a register kept, 
both of negatives and prints. There will be broken 
objects to be mended, objects in delicate condition 
to be treated, restorations to be considered, and 
bead- work to be re-threaded. Then comes the 
indoor photography, for each individual object must 
be photographed to scale, and in some cases from 
several points of view. The list could be extended 
almost indefinitely, and would include a number of 
jobs that would seem to have but a remote con- 
nexion with archaeology, such as account-keeping, 
doctoring the men, and settling their disputes. The 
workmen naturally have one day a week off, and 
the excavator will very likely begin the season with 
the idea that he too will take a weekly holiday. 
He will usually be obliged to abandon the idea after 
the first week, for he will find in this off day too 
good an opportunity to waste of catching up with 
the hundred and one jobs that have got ahead of 
him. 

Such, in broad outline, is the life of the excavator. 
There are certain details of his work, more particu- 
larly those which have to do with note-taking and 
first-aid preservation of the different classes of 
objects, which we should like to dwell on at some- 
what greater length. These are subjects which the 
ordinary reader will probably know little about, and 
they will be well illustrated in our description of the 
laboratory work of the past season. 

Woodwork, for instance, is seldom in good con- 
dition and presents many problems. Damp and the 

*57 




The Tomh of Tut-ankh'Atnen 


white ant are its chief foes, and in unfavourable 
conditions nothing will be left of the wood but a 
heap of black dust, or a shell which crumbles at the 
touch. In the one case an entry in your notes to 
the effect that wood has been present is the most 
that you can do, but in the other there will generally 
be a certain amount of information to be gleaned. 
Measurements can certainly be secured ; and the 
painted remains of an inscription, which may give 
you the name of the owner of the object, and which 
a single breath of wind or touch of the surface would 
be sufficient to efface, can be copied, if taken in hand 
without delay. Again, there will be cases in which 
the wooden frame or core of an object has decayed 
away, leaving scattered remains of the decoration 
— ivory, gold, faience, or what not — which originally 
covered its surface. By careful notes of the exact 
relative positions of this fallen decoration, supple- 
mented by a subsequent fitting and piecing together, 
it will often be possible to w r ork out the exact size 
and shape of the object. Then, by applying the 
original decoration to a new wooden core, you will 
have, instead of a miscellaneous collection of ivory, 
gold and faience fragments, useless for any purpose, 
an object which for all practical purposes is as good 
as new. Preservation of wood, unless it be in the 
very last stage of decay, is always possible by applica- 
tion of melted paraffin wax ; by this means an object, 
which otherwise would have fallen to pieces, can be 
rendered perfectly solid and fit to handle. 

The condition of wood naturally varies according 
to the site, and, fortunately for us, Luxor is in this 
respect perhaps the most favourable site in the whole 
of Egypt. We had trouble with the wood from the 

158 




Work in the Laboratory 


present tomb, but it arose, not from the condition 
in which we originally found it, but from subsequent 
shrinkage owing to change of atmosphere. This in 
an object of plain wood is not such a serious matter, 
but the Egyptians were extremely fond of applying 
a thin layer of gesso, on which prepared surface they 
painted scenes or made use of an overlay of gold 
foil. Naturally, as the wood shrank the gesso cover- 
ing began to loosen up and buckle, and there was 
considerable danger that large parts of the surface 
might be lost. The problem is a difficult one. It is 
a perfectly easy matter to fix paint or gold foil to 
the gesso, but ordinary preservatives will not fix 
gesso to the wood. Here again, as we shall show, 
we had recourse eventually to paraffin wax. 

The condition of textiles varies. Cloth in some 
cases is so strong that it might have come fresh 
from the loom, whereas in others it has been reduced 
by damp almost to the consistency of soot. In the 
present tomb the difficulty of handling it was con- 
siderably increased, both by the rough usage to 
which it had been subjected, and by the fact that 
so many of the garments were covered with a 
decoration of gold rosettes and bead-work. 

Bead-work is in itself a complicated problem, and 
will perhaps tax an excavator’s patience more than 
any other material with which he has to deal. There 
is so much of it. The Egyptians were passionately 
fond of beads, and it is by no means exceptional to 
find upon a single mummy an equipment consisting 
of a number of necklaces, two or three collars, a 
girdle or two, and a full set of bracelets and anklets. 
In such a case many thousands of beads will have 
been employed. Therein lies the test of patience, 

*59 



The Tomb of Tut'ankh'Amen 


for in the recovery and restoration of this bead- 
work every single bead will have to be handled at 
least twice. Very careful work will be necessary to 
secure the original arrangement of the beads. The 
threads that held them together will all have rotted 
away, but nevertheless they will be lying for the 
most part in their correct relative positions, and by 
carefully blowing away the dust it may be possible 
to follow the whole length of necklace or collar, and 
secure the exact order of the beads. Re- threading 
may be done in situ as each section is laid bare — 
on a many-stringed girdle I once had twelve needles 
and thread going simultaneously — or, better still, the 
beads may be transferred one by one to a piece of 
cardboard on which a thin layer of plasticine has 
been spread. This has the advantage that gaps of 
the required length can be left for missing or doubt- 
fully placed beads. 

In very elaborate objects, where it is not possible 
to thread the beads as they are found, careful notes 
must be made, the re-stringing being done later, not 
in exact order, bead for bead, but in accordance 
with the original pattern and design. A tedious 
business this re-stringing will be, and a good deal 
of experimental work Hill probably be necessary 
before you arrive at the correct method of dealing 
with the particular problem. In a collar, for example, 
it may be necessary to have three independent thread- 
ing strings to every bead, if the rows are to lie 
smoothly in place. Restoration .of missing or broken 
parts will sometimes be necessary if a reconstruction 
is to be effected. I once found a set of bracelets 
and anklets in which the rows of beads had been 
separated by perforated bars of wood covered with 

ifc> 




Work in the Laboratory 


gold foil. The wood of which these separators was 
composed had entirely gone, leaving the gold foil 
shells ; so I cut new pieces of wood to the shape, 
burnt out perforation holes with a red-hot needle, 
and covered the new bars with the original gold. 
Such restorations, based on actual evidence, are 
perfectly legitimate, and well worth the trouble. 
You will have secured for your museum, in place 
of a trayful of meaningless beads, or, worse still, a 
purely arbitrary and fanciful reconstruction, an 
object, attractive in itself, which has very consider- 
able archaeological value. 

• Papyrus is frequently difficult to handle, and in 
its treatment more crimes have been committed than 
in any other branch of archaeology. If in fairly sound 
* condition it should be wrapped in a damp cloth for 
a few hours, and then it can easily be straightened 
out under glass. Rolls that are tom and brittle, 
sure to separate into a number of small pieces 
during the process of unwrapping, should never be 
tackled unless you have plenty of time and space 
at your disposal. Careful and systematic work will 
ensure the correct spacing of almost all the frag- 
ments, whereas a desultory sorting, carried out in 
the intervals of other work, and perhaps by various 
hands, will never achieve a satisfactory result, and 
may end in the destruction of much valuable evi- 
dence. If only the Turin papyrus, for instance, had 
received careful treatment when it was first found, 
what a wealth of information it would have given 
us, and what heart-burnings we should have been 
saved 1 

Stone, as a rule, presents few difficulties in the 
field. Limestone will certainly contain salt, which 

161 



The Tomb of Tut ankh'Amen 


must be soaked out of it, but this is a problem that 
can be taken in hand later in the museum, and need 
not detain us here. In the same way faience, pottery, 
and metal objects can usually be left for later treat- 
ment. We are only concerned here with work that 
must be carried out on the spot. 

Detailed and copious notes should be taken at 
every stage of this preliminary work. It is difficult 
to take too many, for, though a thing may be per- 
fectly clear to you at the moment, it by no means 
follows that it will be when the time comes for you 
to work over your material. In tomb-work as many 
notes as possible should be made while everything 
is still in position. Then, when you begin clearing, 
card and pencil should be kept handy, and every 
fresh item of evidence should be noted immediately 
you run across it. You are tempted so often to put 
off making the note until you have finished the 
actual piece of work on which you are engaged, but 
it is dangerous. Something will intervene, and as 
likely as not that particular note will never be made 
at all. 

Now let us move to the laboratory, and put into 
practice some of the theories that we have been 
elaborating. It will be remembered that it was the 
tomb of Seti II (No. 15 in the Wilkinson catalogue 
of tomb numbers) that had been selected for us, and 
here we had established ourselves with our note-cards 
and our preservatives. The tomb was long and 
narrow, so that only the first bay could be used 
for practical work, the inner darker part being 
serviceab'e merely as storage space. As the objects 
were brought in they were deposited, still in their 
stretchers, in the middle section, and covered up 

162 




Work in the Laboratory 


until they should be wanted. Each in turn was 
brought up to the working bay for examination. 
There, after the surface dust had been cleared off, 
measurements, complete archaeological notes, and 
copies of inscriptions were entered on the filing 
cards. The necessary mending and preservative 
treatment followed, after which it was taken just 
outside the entrance for scale photographs to be 
made. Finally, having passed through all these 
stages, the object was stored away in the innermost 
recesses of the tomb to await the final packing. 

In the majority of cases no attempt at final 
treatment was made. It was manifestly impossible, 
for months, probably years, of reconstructive work 
are necessary if full use is to be made of the material. 
All we could do here was to apply preliminary treat- 
ment, sufficient in any event to enable the object 
to support a journey in safety. Final restorations 
must be made in the museum, and they will need 
a far more fully equipped laboratory and a much 
larger staff of skilled helpers than we could ever 
hope to achieve in The Valley. 

As the season advanced, and the laboratory grew 
more and more crowded, it became increasingly diffi- 
cult to keep track of the work, and it was only by 
close attention to detail, and strict adherence to a 
very definite order of procedure, that we managed 
to keep clear of complications. As each object 
arrived its registration number was noted in an 
entry book, and in the same book a record was 
kept of the successive stages of its treatment. Each 
of the primary objects had been given its own 
registration number in the tomb, but as these were 
worked over in the laboratory an elaborate system 

163 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


of sub-numbering became necessary. A box, for 
instance, might contain fifty objects, any one of 
which must be clearly identifiable at all times, and 
these we distinguished by letters of the alphabet, 
or, where necessary, by a combination of letters. 
Constant care was necessary to keep these smaller 
objects from being separated from their identifica- 
tion tickets, especially in cases where protracted 
treatment was required. Not infrequently it hap- 
pened that the component parts of a single object, 
scattered in the tomb, were entered under two or 
more numbers, and in this case cross-references in 
the notes were necessary. Note-cards, as completed, 
were filed away in cabinets, and in these filing 
cabinets we had, by the end of the season, a complete 
history of every object from the tomb, including : — 

(1) Measurements, scale drawings, and archaeo- 

logical notes. 

(2) Notes on the inscriptions by Dr. Alan 

Gardiner. 

(3) Notes by Mr. Lucas on the preservative 

treatment employed. 

(4) A photograph, showing the position of the 

object in the tomb. 

(5) A scale photograph, or scries of photographs, 

of the object itself. 

(6) In the case of boxes, a series of views, show- 

ing the different stages in the clearing. 

So much for our system of work. Let us turn 
now to the individual treatment of a selected number 
of the antiquities. The first that required treat- 
ment in the laboratory was the wonderful painted 
casket (No. 21 in our register), and, if we had searched 

164 





PATNTFXI CXSWVT Nn 91 



Work in the Laboratory 

the whole tomb through, we should have been hard 
put to it to find a single object that presented a 
greater number of problems. For this reason it 
will be worth our while to give a detailed description 
of its treatment. Our first care was for the casket 
itself, which was coated with gesso, and covered 
from top to bottom with brilliantly painted scenes. 
With the exception of a slight widening of the joints 
owing to shrinkage, the wood was in perfect con- 
dition ; the gesso had chipped a little at the corners 
and along the cracks, but was still in a reasonably 
firm state, and the paint, though a little discoloured 
in places, was perfectly fast and showed no signs 
of rubbing. It seemed as though but little treat- 
ment was necessary. The surface dust was removed, 
the discoloration of the painted surfaces was reduced 
with benzine, and the whole exterior of the casket 
was sprayed with a solution of celluloid in amyl- 
acetate to fix the gesso to the wood, particular atten- 
tion being paid to tender places at the cracks. At 
the moment this seemed to be all that was required, 
but it was our first experience of the wood and gesso 
combination from the tomb, and we were to be dis- 
illusioned. Three or four weeks later we noticed 
that the joint cracks were getting wider, and that 
the gesso in other places was showing a tendency 
to buckle. It was clear enough what was happen- 
ing. Owing to the change of temperature from the 
close, humid atmosphere of the tomb to the dry 
airiness of the laboratory, the wood had begun to 
shrink once more, and the gesso, not being able to 
follow it, was coming away from the wood alto- 
gether. The position was serious, for we were in 
danger of losing large parts of the painted surface. 

165 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh*Amen 


Drastic measures were necessary, and after much 
discussion we decided on the use of melted paraffin 
wax. Courage was needed to take the step, but we 
were thoroughly justified by the result, for the wax 
penetrated the materials and held everything firm, 
and, so far from the colours being affected, as we 
had feared, it seemed to make them more brilliant 
than before. We used this process later on a number 
of other objects of wood and gesso, and found it 
extremely satisfactory. It is important that the 
surface should be heated, and that the wax should 
be brought as near to boiling-point as possible ; 
otherwise it will chill and refuse to penetrate. Fail- 
ing an oven we found the Egyptian sun quite hot 
enough for the purpose. Surplus wax can be removed 
by the application of heat, or by the use of ben- 
zine. There is another advantage in the process, 
in that blisters in the gesso can be pressed down 
into place again while the wax is still warm, and 
will hold quite firmly. In very bad cases it may 
be necessary to fill the blister in from behind by 
means of hot wax applied by a pipette. 

So much for the outside of the casket. Now let 
us remove the lid and see what the inside has in 
store for us. This is an exciting moment, for there 
are beautiful things everywhere, and, thanks to the 
hurried re-packing carried out by the officials, there 
is nothing to forewarn one as to what the contents 
of any individual box may be. In this particular case, 
by reference to the four views on Plates XXXIV and 
XXXV, the reader can himself follow the successive 
stages in the clearing, and it will give him some idea 
of the difficulty of handling the material if I explain 
that it took me three weeks of hard work to get 

166 





Plate XXXV 



Work in the Laboratory 


to the bottom of the box. The first photograph 
was taken immediately after the lid had been re- 
moved, and before anything was touched. On the 
right there is a pair of rush and papyrus sandals, 
in perfect condition ; below them, just showing, a 
gilt head-rest, and, lower again, a confused mass of 
cloth, leather, and gold, of which we can make 
nothing as yet. On the left, crumpled into a bundle, 
there is a magnificent royal robe, and in the upper 
corner there are roughly shaped beads of dark resin. 
The robe it was that presented us with our first 
problem, a problem that was constantly to recur — 
how best to handle cloth that crumbled at the 
touch, and yet was covered with elaborate and heavy 
decoration. In this particular case the whole sur- 
face of the robe is covered with a network of 
faience beads, with a gold sequin filling in every 
alternate square in the net. These — beads and 
sequins — had originally been sewn to the cloth, but 
are now loose. A great many of them are upside 
down, the releasing of the tension when the thread 
snapped having evidently caused them to spring. At 
the borders of the robe — they are underneath, and 
do not show in the photograph — there are bands of 
tiny glass beads of various colours, arranged in 
patterns. The upper layer of cloth was very decep- 
tive in appearance. It looked reasonably solid, but 
if one tried to lift it, it fell to pieces in one’s hand 
Below, where it had been in contact with other 
things, the condition was much worse. 

This question of cloth and its treatment was 
enormously complicated for us in the present tomb 
by the rough usage to which it had been subjected. 
Had it been spread out flat, or neatly folded, it 

167 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


would have been a comparatively simple matter to 
deal with it. We should, as a matter of fact, have 
had an easier task if it had been allowed to remain 
strewn about the floor of the chamber, as the 
plunderers had left it. Nothing could have been 
worse for our purposes than the treatment it had 
undergone in the tidying-up process, in which the 
various garments had been crushed, bundled and 
interfolded, and packed tightly into boxes with a 
mixture of other and, in some cases, most incon- 
gruous objects. 

In the case of this present robe it would have 
been perfectly simple to solidify the whole of the 
upper layer and remove it in one piece, but this 
was a process to which there were serious objec- 
tions. It involved, firstly, a certain amount of danger 
to whatever might lie beneath, for in the unpacking 
of these boxes we had to be continually on our 
guard lest, in our enthusiasm over the treatment 
or removal of an object, we might inflict damage 
on a still more valuable one which lay under it. 
Then, again, if we made the upper part of the robe 
solid, we should seriously have reduced the chances 
of extracting evidence as to size and shape, to say 
nothing of the details of ornamentation. In dealing 
with all these robes there were two alternatives 
before us. Something had to be sacrificed, and we 
had to make up our minds whether it should be the 
cloth or the decoration. It would have been quite 
possible, by the use of preservatives, to secure large 
pieces of the cloth, but, in the process, we should 
inevitably have disarranged and damaged the bead 
ornamentation that lay below. On the other hand, 
by sacrificing the cloth, picking it carefully away 

1 68 




(a) The buckle of sandal (b) in elaborate gold work. 



(b) The sandal, with toe-tliong 
of open-work gold. 


(c) The slipper of leather, with 
elaborate decoration of gold. 


Plate XXXVI 



rrur VI KCJS rolTRT SANDAL AND SLIPPER. 



Work in the Laboratory 


piece by piece, we could recover; as a rule, the whole 
scheme of decoration. This was the plan we usually 
adopted. Later, in the museum, it will be possible 
to make a new garment of the exact size, to which 
the original ornamentation — bead-work, gold sequins, 
or whatever it may be — can be applied. Restorations 
of this kind will be far more useful, and have a 
much greater archaeological value, than a few irregu- 
larly shaped pieces of preserved cloth and a collection 
of loose beads and sequins. 

The size of the robe from this casket can be 
worked out with reasonable accuracy from the orna- 
mentation. At the lower hem there was a band, 
composed of tiny beads arranged in a pattern, a 
pattern of which we were able to secure the exact 
details. From this band there hung, at equal inter- 
vals, a series of bead strings with a large pendant 
at the end of each string. We can thus calculate 
the circumference of the hem by multiplying the 
space between the strings by the number of pendants. 
That gives us the width of the robe. Now we can 
calculate the total area of decoration from the num- 
ber of gold sequins employed, and, if we divide this 
total area by our known circumference at the bottom, 
we shall arrive at a fairly accurate approximation 
of the height. This naturally presupposes that our 
robe is the same width throughout, a method of 
cutting borne out by a number of undecorated 
garments of which we were able to secure the exact 
measurements. 

This has been a long digression, but it was neces- 
sary, to show the nature of the problem with which 
we had to deal. We can return to the casket now, 
and really begin to explore its contents. First of 

m 169 




The Tomb of TuPankh-Amen 


all we removed the rush sandals, which were in beau- 
tifully firm condition, and presented no difficulties 
(Plate XXXIV, b). Next came the gilt head-rest, and 
then, very carefully, we removed the robe. One 
large portion of its upper surface we managed to 
take out whole by the aid of a celluloid solution, 
and short lengths of the band decorations of small 
beads we preserved in wax for future reference. The 
third photograph (Plate XXXV, c) shows what we may 
call the second layer of the casket’s contents. Here, to 
begin with, were three pairs of sandals, or rather, to be 
accurate, two pairs of sandals and a pair of loose slip- 
pers. These were of leather, elaborately decorated 
with gold, and of wonderful workmanship (two of them 
are shown on Plate XXXVI). Unfortunately, their 
condition left much to be desired. They had suffered 
from their packing in the first place, but, worse than 
that, some of the leather had melted and run, gluing 
the sandals together and fastening them to other 
objects, making their extraction from the box a 
matter of extreme difficulty. So much of the leather 
had perished that the question of restoration became 
a serious problem. We secured the gold ornamenta- 
tion that still remained in place with a solution of 
Canada balsam, and strengthened them generally as 
far as we could, but eventually it will probably be 
better to make new sandals and apply the old 
decoration to them. 

Beneath the sandals there was a mass of decayed 
cloth, much of it of the consistency of soot, thickly 
spangled throughout with rosettes and sequins of 
gold and silver. This, sad to relate, represents a 
number of royal robes. The difficulty of trying to 
extract any intelligible record from it can be imag- 

170 





IIAXXX 





Work in the Laboratory 


ined, but a certain amount of assistance was given 
by the differences in the sizes and shapes of the 
sequins. There were at least seven distinct gar- 
ments. One was an imitation leopard-skin cloak in 
cloth, with gilt head, and spots and claws of silver 
(see last photograph of the series, Plate XXXV, d) ; 
while two of the others were head-dresses, made in 
the semblance of hawks with outstretched wings, of 
the type shown in Plate LXXVIII. Bundled in 
with the actual garments there were a number of 
other objects — two faience collarettes of beads and 
pendants, two caps or bags of tiny bead-work which 
had almost entirely fallen to pieces, a wooden tag 
inscribed in hieratic “ Papyrus (?) sandals of His 
Majesty,” a glove of plain linen, an archer’s gauntlet, 
tapestry woven in coloured thread, a double necklace 
of large flat faience beads ( see Plate XXXV, d), and 
a number of linen belts or scarves. Below the gar- 
ments there was a layer of rolls and pads of cloth, 
some of which were loin-cloths and others mere 
bandages ; and below these again, resting on the 
bottom of the box, there were two boards, perforated 
at one end for hanging, whose purpose is still doubtful. 

With very few exceptions — the rush sandals are 
a case in point — the garments it contained were 
those of a child. Our first idea was that the king 
might have kept stored away the clothes he wore 
as a boy ; but later, on one of the belts, and on 
the sequins of one of the robes, we found the royal 
cartouche. He must, then, have worn them after he 
became king, from which it would seem to follow 
that he was quite a young boy when he succeeded 
to the throne. Another interesting piece of evidence 
in this connexion is supplied by the fact that on 

* 7 * 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


the lid of one of the other boxes there is a docket 
which reads, “ The King’s side-lock (?) as a boy.” 
The question raises an interesting historical point, 
and we shall be eager to see, when the time comes, 
the evidence of age that the mummy will supply. 
Certainly, whenever the king appears upon the tomb 
furniture, he is represented as little more than a 
youth. 

One other point with regard to the robes found 
in this and other boxes. Many of them are decorated 
with patterns in coloured linen threads. Some of 
these are examples of tapestry weaving, similar to 
the fragments found in the tomb of Thothmes IV , 1 
but there were also undoubted cases of applied 
needlework. The material from this tomb will be of 
extreme importance to the history of textile art, 
and it needs very careful study. 

We shall not have space here to describe the 
unpacking of the other boxes, but all were in the 
same jumbled state, and all had the same queer 
mixture of incongruous objects. Many of them con- 
tained from fifty to sixty individual pieces, each re- 
quiring its own registration card, and there was never 
any lack of excitement in the unpacking, for you 
never knew when you might not happen upon a 
magnificent gold scarab, a statuette, or a beautiful 
piece of jewellery. It was slow work, naturally, for 
hours at a time had to be spent working out with 
brush and bellows the exact order and arrangement 
of collar, necklace, or gold decoration, covered, as 
they ordinarily were, with the dust of decayed 
cloth. The collars were a frequent source of trouble. 

1 Carter and Newberry, Tomb of Thouimosi* IV, Pis. I and XXVIII. 
Nos. 46526-46529. 


J72 




a! 



Plate XXXVIII 


RECONSTRUCTION OF CORSLET. 



Work in the Laboratory 


We found eight in all, of the Tell el Amama leaf 
and flower type, and it needed great care and patience 
to work out the exact arrangement of the different 
types of pendants. One of these is shown on Plate 
XXXIX, laid out loosely on ground glass to be 
photographed. They still need quite a lot of treat- 
ment to bring them back to their original colours, 
and there will have to be a certain amount of restora- 
tion of the broken and missing parts before they 
are ready for the final re-stringing. In one case 
we were lucky, for an elaborate three-string neck- 
lace, with a gilt pectoral at one end and a scarab- 
pendant at the other, lay flat upon the bottom of 
a box, so that we were able to remove it bead by 
bead, and re-string it on the spot in its exact original 
order (Plate XL). 

The most elaborate piece of reconstruction that 
we had to do was in connexion with the corslet, 
which has been referred to more than once. This 
was a very elaborate affair, consisting of four separ- 
ate parts — the corslet proper, inlaid with gold and 
carnelian, with border bands and braces of gold 
and coloured inlay ; a collar with conventional 
imitation of beads in gold, carnelian, and green and 
blue faience ; and two magnificent pectorals of open- 
work gold with coloured inlay, one for the chest, 
the other to hang behind as make-weight. Corslets 
of this type are depicted commonly enough on the 
monuments, and were evidently frequently worn, but 
we have never before been lucky enough to find a 
complete example. Unfortunately, the parts of it 
were sadly scattered, and there were points in the 
reconstruction of which we could not be absolutely 
certain. Most of it was found in Box 54, but, as 

173 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 

we have already stated in Chapter VII, there were 
also parts of it in the small gold shrine and in Boxes 
101 and 115, and single pieces from it were found 
scattered on the floor of the Antechamber, passage, 
and staircase. It was interesting working out the 
way in which it all fitted together, and the photo- 
graphs on Plate XXXVIII show our tentative re- 
construction. 

In Plate XXXVII we see the corslet proper as it 
lay in Box 54, resting upon a number of faience liba- 
tion vases. This gave us the pattern and arrangement, 
with its upper and lower bands of inlaid gold plaques, 
and we were also able to recover from it its exact 
height in two or three separate places, and the fact 
that it was not the same height all the way round. 
It showed us, besides, that the upper row of the collar 
was joined on to the gold plaque brace bands, and 
that the gold bars fitted at the shoulders to the 
top of the brace bands. The exact order of the 
collar was recovered from the parts found in the 
gold shrine. The pectorals were also in the gold 
shrine, lying beside the collar sections, and that they 
actually fitted to the collar was proved by the curve 
of their upper edges. There were other gold bars in 
addition to those for the shoulders, and the per- 
forated thread-holes in these, corresponding exactly 
with the holes in the scales, showed that they must 
have belonged to the corslet proper. These bars and 
the shoulder-bars alike were held together by sliding 
pins, to be adjusted after the corslet was in position. 
Our present reconstruction is , purely a tentative one 
put together for photographic purposes, but the only 
really doubtful point in it is whether the gold bars 
fit to the front and back of the corslet, as they are 

>74 






Work in the Laboratory 

here shown, or to its sides. The reason we have 
placed them in this position is that the bars are of 
different sizes, and by no combination is it possible 
to make the two equal lengths which the sides would 
require. The front and back of the corslet, on the 
other hand, we know were of different lengths. There 
are still a number of pieces missing, and these we 
hope may still tum up in the innermost chamber or 
in the Annexe. 

The greater part of our winter’s work in the 
laboratory was concerned with the boxes, working 
out and sorting over their confused jumble of con- 
tents. The single, larger, objects were much easier 
to deal with. Some were in very good condition, 
requiring nothing but surface cleaning and noting, 
but there were others which needed a certain amount 
of attention, if only minor repairs to make them 
fit for transport. In all our mending we had con- 
stant recourse to our box of floor-sweepings, frag- 
ments recovered by sweeping up and sifting the last 
layer of dust from the floor both of the Antechamber 
and entrance passage, and not infrequently we found 
there the piece of inlay, or whatever it might be, 
for which we were looking. The chariots we have 
not yet made any attempt to deal with. That 
must be done in Cairo later on, for they are in a 
great many sections, and their sorting and treatment 
will require very considerable working space — much 
more space than we can possibly arrange for in 
The Valley. As I explained earlier in the chapter, 
the restoration and study of the material from this 
tomb will provide work for all of us for many 
years to come. In the field, preliminary work is as 
much as we can hope to do. 

■75 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


At the end of the season there came the question 
of packing, always an anxious business, but doubly 
so in this case owing to the enormous value of the 
material. Protection from dust as well as from 
actual damage was an important point, so every 
object was completely wrapped in cotton- wool or 
cloth, or both, before it was placed in its box. Deli- 
cate surfaces, such as the parts of the throne, the 
legs of the chairs and beds, or the bows and staves, 
were swathed in narrow bandages, in case anything 
should work loose in transit. Very fragile objects, 
like the funerary bouquets and the sandals, which 
would not bear ordinary packing, were laid in bran. 
Great care was taken to keep the antiquities in strictly 
classified groups, textiles all in one box, jewellery all 
in another, and so on. There may well be a delay 
of a year or two before some of the boxes are un- 
packed, and it will be a great saving of time and 
labour if all the objects of one type are in a single 
box. Eighty-nine boxes in all were packed, but to 
lessen the danger in transit these were enclosed 
within thirty-four heavy packing-cases. 

Then came the question of transport. At the 
river bank a steam barge was waiting, sent by the 
Department of Antiquities, but between the labora- 
tory and the river stretched a distance of five and 
a half miles of rough road, with awkward curves 
and dangerous gradients. Three possibilities of trans- 
port were open to us — camels, hand porterage and 
Decauville railway, and we decided on the third as 
least likely to jar the cases. They were loaded, 
accordingly, on a number of flat cars, and by the 
evening of May 13th they were ready to begin their 
journey down The Valley, the road by which they 

176 





Plate XL 



Work in the Laboratory 


had passed, under such different circumstances, three 
thousand years before. 

At daybreak on the following morning the cars 
began to move. Now, when we talk of railways the 
reader must not imagine that we had a line laid down 
for us all the way to the river, for a permanent way 
would take many months to construct. We had, 
on the contrary, to lay it as we went, carrying the 
rails round in a continuous chain as the cars moved 
forward. Fifty labourers were engaged in the work, 
and each had his particular job, pushing the cars, 
laying the rails, or bringing up the spare ones from 
behind. It sounds a tedious process, but it is wonder- 
ful how fast the ground can be covered. By ten 
o’clock on the morning of the 15th — fifteen hours 
of actual work — the whole distance had been accom- 
plished, and the cases were safely stowed upon the 
barge. There were some anxious moments in the 
rough Valley-road, but nothing untoward happened, 
and the fact that the whole operation was carried 
out in such short time, and without any kind of 
mishap, is a fine testimonial to the zeal of our work- 
men. I may add that the work was carried out 
under a scorching sun, with a shade temperature of 
considerably over a hundred, the metal rails under 
these conditions being almost too hot to touch. 

On the river journey the cases were in charge of 
an escort of soldiers supplied by the Mudir of the 
Province, and after a seven-day journey all arrived 
safely in Cairo. There we unpacked a few of the 
more valuable objects, to be placed on immediate 
exhibition. The rest of the cases remain stored in 
the museum until such time as we shall be able to 
take in hand the question of final restorations. 

1 77 



CHAPTER XI 

The Opening of the Sealed Door 

B Y the middle of February our work in the 
Antechamber was finished. With the excep- 
tion of the two sentinel statues, left for a 
special reason, all its contents had been removed to 
the laboratory, every inch of its floor had been swept 
and sifted for the last bead or fallen piece of inlay, 
and it now stood bare and empty. We were ready 
at last to penetrate the mystery of the sealed door. 

Friday, the 17th, was the day appointed, and 
at two o’clock those who were to be privileged 
to witness the ceremony met by appointment above 
the tomb. They included Lord Carnarvon, Lady 
Evelyn Herbert, H.E. Abd el Halim Pasha Suleman, 
Minister of Public Works, M. Lacau, Director-General 
of the Service of Antiquities, Sir William Garstin, 
Sir Charles Cust, Mr. Lythgoe, Curator of the Egyptian 
Department of the Metropolitan Museum, New York, 
Professor Breasted, Dr. Alan Gardiner, Mr. Winlock, 
the Hon. Mervyn Herbert, the Hon. Richard Bethel], 
Mr. Engelbach, Chief Inspector of the Department 
of Antiquities, three Egyptian inspectors of the 
Department of Antiquities, the representative of 
the Government Press Bureau, and the members of 
the staff — about twenty persons in all. By a quarter 
past two the whole company had assembled, so we 
removed our coats and filed down the sloping passage 
into the tomb. 


178 






The Opening of the Sealed Door 


In the Antechamber everything was prepared and 
ready, and to those who had not visited it since 
the original opening of the tomb it must have pre- 
sented a strange sight. We had screened the statues 
with boarding to protect them from possible damage, 
and between them we had erected a small plat- 
form, just high enough to enable us to reach the 
upper part of the doorway, having determined, as 
the safest plan, to work from the top downwards. 
A short distance back from the platform there was 
a barrier, and beyond, knowing that there might 
be hours of work ahead of us, we had provided chairs 
for the visitors. On either side standards had been 
set up for our lamps, their light shining full upon 
the doorway. Looking back, we realize what a 
strange, incongruous picture the chamber must have 
presented, but at the time I question whether such 
an idea even crossed our minds. One thought and 
one only was possible. There before us lay the 
sealed door, and with its opening we were to blot 
out the centuries and stand in the presence of a 
king who reigned three thousand years ago. My 
own feelings as I mounted the platform were a 
strange mixture, and it was with a trembling hand 
that I struck the first blow. 

My first care was to locate the wooden lintel 
above the door : then very carefully I chipped away 
the plaster and picked out the small stones which 
formed the uppermost layer of the filling. The 
temptation to stop and peer inside at every moment 
was irresistible, and when, after about ten minutes’ 
work, I had made a hole large enough to enable me 
to do so, I inserted an electric torch. An astonishing 
sight its light revealed, for there, within a yard of 

179 



The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


the doorway, stretching as far as one could see and 
blocking the entrance to the chamber, stood what 
to all appearance was a solid wall of gold. For the 
moment there was no clue as to its meaning, so as 
quickly as I dared I set to work to widen the hole. 
This had now become an operation of considerable 
difficulty, for the stones of the masonry were not 
accurately squared blocks built regularly upon one 
another, but rough slabs of varying size, some so 
heavy that it took all one’s strength to lift them : 
many of them, too, as the weight above was removed, 
were left so precariously balanced that the least false 
movement would have sent them sliding inwards to 
crash upon the contents of the chamber below. We 
were also endeavouring to preserve the seal-impres- 
sions upon the thick mortar of the outer face, and 
this added considerably to the difficulty of handling 
the stones. Mace and Callender were helping me by 
this time, and each stone was cleared on a regular 
system. With a crowbar I gently eased it up, Mace 
holding it to prevent it falling forwards ; then he 
and I lifted it out and passed it back to Callender, 
who transferred it on to one of the foremen, and so, 
by a chain of workmen, up the passage and out of 
the tomb altogether. 

With the removal of a very few stones the mys- 
tery of the golden wall was solved. We were at the 
entrance of the actual burial-chamber of the king* 
and that which barred our way was the side of an 
immense gilt shrine built to cover and protect the 
sarcophagus. It was visible now from the Ante- 
chamber by the light of the standard lamps, and as 
stone after stone was removed, and its gilded sur- 
face came gradually into view, we could, as though 

180 





Plate XLII 

SEALED DOORWAY TO THE SEPULCHRAL CHAMBER. 
(Showing the reclosing of the plunderers’ hole at bottom.) 



The Opening of the Sealed Door 


by electric current, feel the tingle of excitement 
which thrilled the spectators behind the barrier. 
The photographs on Plates XLIII and XLIV, taken 
during the progress of the work, will give the reader 
some idea of what they actually saw. We who were 
doing the work were probably less excited, for our 
whole energies were taken up with the task in hand 
— that of removing the blocking without an accident. 
The fall of a single stone might have done irreparable 
damage to the delicate surface of the shrine, so, 
directly the hole was large enough, we made an 
additional protection for it by inserting a mattress 
on the inner side of the door-blocking, suspending it 
from the wooden lintel of the doorway. Two hours 
of hard work it took us to clear away the blocking, 
or at least as much of it as was necessary for the 
moment; and at one point, when near the bottom, 
we had to delay operations for a space while we 
collected the scattered beads from a necklace brought 
by the plunderers from the chamber within and 
dropped upon the threshold. This last was a terrible 
trial to our patience, for it was a slow business, and 
we were all of us excited to see what might be within ; 
but finally it was done, the last stones were removed, 
and the way to the innermost chamber lay open 
before us. 

In clearing away the blocking of the doorway 
we had discovered that the level of the inner chamber 
was about four feet lower than that of the Ante- 
chamber, and this, combined with the fact that 
there was but a narrow space between door and 
shrine, made an entrance by no means easy to effect. 
Fortunately, there were no smaller antiquities at 
this end of the chamber, so I lowered myself down, 

181 




The Tomb of TuPankh'Amen 


and then, taking one of the portable lights, I edged 
cautiously to the corner of the shrine and looked 
beyond it. At the corner two beautiful alabaster 
vases blocked the way, but I could see that if these 
were removed we should have a clear path to the 
other end of the chamber ; so, carefully marking 
the spot on which they stood, I picked them up — 
with the exception of the king’s wishing-cup they 
were of finer quality and more graceful shape than 
any we had yet found — and passed them back to 
the Antechamber. Lord Carnarvon and M. Lacau 
now joined me, and, picking our way along the 
narrow passage between shrine and wall, paying out 
the wire of our light behind us, we investigated 
further. 

It was, beyond any question, the sepulchral cham- 
ber in which we stood, for there, towering above us, 
was one of the great gilt shrines beneath which kings 
were laid. So enormous was this structure (17 feet 
by 11 feet, and 9 feet high, we found afterwards) 
that it filled within a little the entire area of the 
chamber, a space of some two feet only separating 
it from the walls on all four sides, while its roof, 
with comice top and toms moulding, reached almost 
to the ceiling. From top to bottom it was overlaid 
with gold, and upon its sides there were inlaid panels 
of brilliant blue faience, in which were represented, 
repeated over and over, the magic symbols which 
would ensure its strength and safety. Around the 
shrine, resting upon the ground, there were a num- 
ber of funerary emblems, and, at the north end, the 
seven magic oars the king would need to ferry him- 
self across the waters of the underworld. The walls 
of the chamber, unlike those of the Antechamber, 

18 2 





Plate XLIII 

OPENING OF THE SEALED DOORWAY TO THE SEPULCHRAL 
CHAMBER: CARNARVON AND CARTER. 



The Opening of the Sealed Door 


were decorated with brightly painted scenes and 
inscriptions, brilliant in their colours, but evidently 
somewhat hastily executed. 

These last details we must have noticed subse- 
quently, for at the time our one thought was of 
the shrine and of its safety. Had the thieves pene- 
trated within it and disturbed the royal burial ? 
Here, on the eastern end, were the great folding 
doors, closed and bolted, but not sealed, that would 
answer the question for us. Eagerly we drew the 
bolts, swung back the doors, and there within was 
a second shrine with similar bolted doors, and upon 
the bolts a seal, intact. This seal we determined not 
to break, for our doubts were resolved, and we could 
not penetrate further without risk of serious damage 
to the monument. I think at the moment we did 
not even want to break the seal, for a feeling of 
intrusion had descended heavily upon us with the 
opening of the doors, heightened, probably, by the 
almost painful impressiveness of a linen pall, decor- 
ated with golden rosettes, which drooped above the 
inner shrine. We felt that we were in the presence 
of the dead King and must do him reverence, and 
in imagination could see the doors of the successive 
shrines open one after the other till the innermost 
disclosed the King himself. Carefully, and as silently 
as possible, we re-closed the great swing doors, and 
passed on to the farther end of the chamber. 

Here a surprise awaited us, for a low door, east- 
wards from the sepulchral chamber, gave entrance 
to yet another chamber, smaller than the outer ones 
and not so lofty. This doorway, unlike the others, 
had not been closed and sealed. We were able, from 
where we stood, to get a clear view of the whole of 

183 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


the contents, and a single glance sufficed to tell us 
that here, within this little chamber, lay the greatest 
treasures of the tomb. Facing the doorway, on the 
farther side, stood the most beautiful monument 
that I have ever seen — so lovely that it made one 
gasp with wonder and admiration. The central por- 
tion of it consisted of a large shrine-shaped chest, 
completely overlaid with gold, and surmounted by a 
cornice of sacred cobras. Surrounding this, free- 
standing, were statues of the four tutelary goddesses of 
the dead — gracious figures with outstretched protec- 
tive arms, so natural and lifelike in their pose, so 
pitiful and compassionate the expression upon their 
faces, that one felt it almost; sacrilege to look at 
them. One guarded the shrine on each of its four 
sides, but whereas the figures at front and back kept 
their gaze firmly fixed upon their charge, an addi- 
tional note of touching realism was imparted by the 
other two, for their heads were turned sideways, 
looking over their shoulders towards the entrance, 
as though to watch against surprise. There is a 
simple grandeur about this monument that made an 
irresistible appeal to the imagination, and I am not 
ashamed to confess that it brought a lump to my 
throat. It is undoubtedly the Canopic chest and 
contains the jars which play such an important part 
in the ritual of mummification. 

There were a number of other wonderful things 
in the chamber, but we found it hard to take them 
in at the time, so inevitably were one’s eyes drawn 
back again and again to the lovely little goddess 
figures. Immediately in front of the entrance lay 
the figure of the jackal god Anubis, upon his shrine, 
swathed in linen cloth, and resting upon a portable 

184 





Plate XLIV 


OPENING OF THE SEALED DOORWAY TO THE SEPULCHRAL 
CHAMBER: CARTER AND MACE. 




The Opening of the Sealed Door 


sled, and behind this the head of a bull upon a stand 
— emblems, these, of the underworld. In the south 
side of the chamber lay an endless number of black 
shrines and chests, all closed and sealed save one, 
whose open doors revealed statues of Tut*ankh*Amen 
standing upon black leopards. On the farther wall 
were more shrine-shaped boxes and miniature coffins 
of gilded wood, these last undoubtedly containing 
funerary statuettes of the king. In the centre of 
the room, left of the Anubis and the bull, there was 
a row of magnificent caskets of ivory and wood, 
decorated and inlaid with gold and blue faience, 
one, whose lid we raised, containing a gorgeous 
ostrich-feather fan with ivory handle, fresh and strong 
to all appearance as when it left the maker’s hand. 
There were also, distributed in different quarters of 
the chamber, a number of model boats with sails 
and rigging all complete, and, at the north side, yet 
another chariot. 

Such, from a hurried survey, were the contents 
of this innermost chamber. We looked anxiously for 
evidence of plundering, but on the surface there was 
none. Unquestionably the thieves must have entered, 
but they cannot have done more than open two or 
three of the caskets. Most of the boxes, as has been 
said, have still their seals intact, and the whole con- 
tents of the chamber, in fortunate contrast to those 
of the Antechamber and the Annexe, still remain in 
position exactly as they were placed at the time of 
burial. 

How much time we occupied in this first survey 
of the wonders of the tomb I cannot say, but it must 
have seemed endless to those anxiously waiting in 
the Antechamber. Not more than three at a time 

185 


H 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


could be admitted with safety, so, when Lord Car- 
narvon and M. Lacau came out, the others came in 
pairs : first Lady Evelyn Herbert, the only woman 
present, with Sir William Garstin, and then the rest 
in turn. It was curious, as we stood in the Ante- 
chamber, to watch their faces as, one by one, they 
emerged from the door. Each had a dazed, bewil- 
dered look in his eyes, and each in turn, as he came 
out, threw up his hands before him, an unconscious 
gesture of impotence to describe in words the wonders 
that he had seen. They were indeed indescribable, 
and the emotions they had aroused in our minds 
were of too intimate a nature to communicate, even 
though we had the words at our command. It was 
an experience which, I am sure, none of us who 
were present is ever likely to forget, for in imagina- 
tion — and not wholly in imagination either — we had 
been present at the funeral ceremonies of a king 
long dead and almost forgotten. At a quarter past 
two we had filed down into the tomb, and when, 
three hours later, hot, dusty, and dishevelled, we 
came out once more into the light of day, the very 
Valley seemed to have changed for us and taken 
on a more personal aspect. We had been given the 
Freedom. 

February 17th was a day set apart for an inspec- 
tion of the tomb by Egyptologists, and fortunately 
most of those who were in the country were able 
to be present. On the following day the Queen of 
the Belgians and her son Prince Alexander, who had 
come to Egypt for that special purpose, honoured 
us with a visit, and were keenly interested in every- 
thing they saw. Lord and Lady Allenby and a num- 

186 








The Opening of the Sealed Door 


ber of other distinguished visitors were present on 
this occasion. A week later, for reasons stated in 
an earlier chapter, the tomb was closed and once 
again re-buried. 

So ends our preliminary season’s work on the 
tomb of King Tut*ankh-Amen. Now as to that 
which lies ahead of us. In the coming winter our 
first task, a difficult and anxious one, will be the 
dismantling of the shrines in the sepulchral chamber. 
It is probable, from evidence supplied by the Rameses 
IV papyrus, that there will be a succession of no fewer 
than five of these shrines, built one within the other, 
before we come to the stone sarcophagus in which 
the king is lying, and in the spaces between these 
shrines we may expect to find a number of beautiful 
objects. With the mummy — if, as we hope and 
believe, it remains untouched by plunderers — there 
should certainly lie the crowns and other regalia of 
a king of Egypt. How long this work in the sepul- 
chral chamber will take we cannot tell at present, 
but it must be finished before we tackle the inner- 
most chamber of all, and we shall count ourselves 
lucky if we can accomplish the clearing of both in 
a single season. A further season will surely be 
required for the Annexe with its confused jumble of 
contents. 

Imagination falters at the thought of what the 
tomb may yet disclose, for the material dealt with 
in the present volume represents but a quarter — 
and that probably the least important quarter — of 
the treasure which it contains. There are still many 
exciting moments in store for us before we complete 
our task, and we look forward eagerly to the work 
that lies ahead. One shadow must inevitably rest 

187 




The Tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen 


upon it, one regret, which all the world must share — 
the fact that Lord Carnarvon was not permitted 
to see the full fruition of his work ; and in the 
completion of that work we, who are to carry it 
out, would dedicate to his memory the best that 
in us lies. 



APPENDIX 

DESCRIPTION OF THE OBJECTS 
(Plates XL VI — LXXIX) 



Plate XLVI 


THE KING’S WISHINC-CUP IN ALABASTER (CALCITE) 
OF LOTIFORM 

The decoration of the bowl comprises a whorl of 
calices and sepals in low relief. The handles consist 
of lotus flowers and buds supporting the emblem of 
‘‘Eternal Life.” Upon the bowl are the prenomen 
and nomen of the king, and the legend around the 
rim reads : 

"May he lire, Horus ’Strong Bull fair of births,* the Two 
Goddesses * Beautiful of ordinances, quelling the Two Lands/ 
Horus of Gold 4 Wearing the diadems and propitiating the 
Gods/ The King of Upper and Lower Egypt, Lord of the Two 
Lands, Neb-Kheperu* Re, granted life ." 1 

" Live thy Ko, and mayst thou spend millions of years, thou 
lover of Thebes, sitting with thy face to the north wind, and 
thy eyes beholding felicity." * 

1 The titulary of Tutankh-Amea. 

* The wish. 





Plate XLVII 


ALABASTER < CALOTTE) PERFUME VASE RESTING 
UPON AN ORNAMENTAL STAND 

It is flanked by the emblem of 44 Myriads of 
Years, 9 * and the bindings of papyrus and lotus 
which symbolize the union of the 44 Two Lands 99 or 
Kingdoms of Upper and Lower Egypt. 



Plate XLVIH 


ALABASTER (CALCITE) PERFUME VASE RESTING UPON 
A TRELLIS- W ORK PEDESTAL 

Like the preceding vase (Plate XLVII) it is 
flanked by symbols of “Years” and the “Union 
of the Kingdoms.” The inlaid bosses are of obsidian 
— volcanic glass. 







Plate XLIX 

(a) ONE OF THE KING’S BEDS CARVED IN SOLID 

EBONY WITH STRING MESH 

The fore and hind legs are of feline type. 

(b) The open-work foot panel, of ebony, ivory 
and gold, represents BES and THOUERIS, the tute- 
lary gods of the household. 


x 93 



Plate L 


SCENE IN MINIATURE PAINTING UPON THE 
RIGHT-HAND SIDE OF THE LID OF THE PAINTED 
CASKET, No. 21 

In the centre we see the king in his chariot 
shooting desert fauna, among which can be identified 
gazelle, hartebeest, wild-ass, ostrich, and striped 
hyena, fleeing before His Majesty’s hounds. Behind 
the king are represented his fan-bearers, courtiers 
and body-guard. In the field are depicted desert 
flora. 

(See pp. 110-111.) 




Pf.ATF 






Platf LI 



Plate LI 

SCENE IN MINIATURE PAINTING? UPON THE 
LEFT-HAND SIDE OF THE LID OF THE PAINTED 
CASKET, No. 21 

This is a similar composition to that in the pre- 
ceding plate (L), but here Tut • ankh ? Amen hunts 
lions and lionesses. The minuteness of detail, sense 
of movement, and agonized expression of the dying 
animals rank this miniature painting as the finest 
of its kind, far surpassing Persian examples. 

(See pp. 110-111.) 


*95 



Plate LII 

SCENE IN MINIATURE PAINTING UPON THE LEFT 
SIDE PANEL OF THE PAINTED CASKET, No. 21 

Here Tut *ankh» Amen is represented in his war 
chariot, slaughtering his Southern or African foes. 
He is supported by fan-bearers, charioteers and bow- 
men, and above him are the protective vultures of 
NEKHEBET, and the Sun’s disk encircled by Royal 
URAEI with pendant 44 ANKHS,” the symbols of life. 

(See pp. 110-111.) 




Il l ^l l d 






Plate LIII 




Plate LIII 


SCENE IN MINIATURE PAINTING UPON THE RIGHT 
SIDE PANEL OF THE PAINTED CASKET, No. 21 

The scheme of ornamentation here is similar to 
that on the left side panel (Plate LII), except that 
theJking is represented slaughtering his Northern or 
Asiatic enemies. The whole mass of this ornament, 
like that of the left panel, is made up of multi- 
tudinous human figures in every kind of action — and 
magnificent action. The king is shown in his chariot, 
drawing his bow, his sheaves of arrows rattling at 
his sides, and the slain falling under him as before 
a pestilence. 


(See pp. 110-111.) 



Plate LIV 


SCENES UPON THE FRONT (a) AND BACK (») PANELS 
OF THE PAINTED CASKET, No. 21 

They depict the king as a sphinx trampling upon 
his enemies. In the centre of each panel are the 
two cartouches of Tut • ankh * Amen. 










Plate LV 


LARGE CEDAR-WOOD CASKET INLAID AND VENEERED 
WITH EBONY AND IVORY 
(No. 32) 

The casket lias sliding poles to carry it by, fixed 
in staples on the bottom. 


199 



Plate LVI 


(a) AN ALABASTER (CALCITE) CASKET 
(No. 40) 

The ornamentation is deeply incised and filled in 
with coloured pigments. The knobs are made of 
polished obsidian — a natural volcanic glass. 

(b) DECORATED GILT CASKET 
(No. 44) 

The panels of the lid and four sides of the box 
are of blue faience overlaid with gilt gesso orna- 
mentation. The devices on the side panels comprise 
the prenomen and nomen of the king, with pendant 
URAEI surmounted with sun-disks. On the lid are 
the banner-names of the king, and on the front of 
the casket are the symbols “ HEH ” of Eternity. The 
knobs are of violet faience with cartouches of the 
king inlaid in pale blue. 


200 





Plate LVII 

(a) a solid ivory jewel box 

(No. 54 ddd) 


The knobs, hinges and feet casings are of gold. 
Carved on the front are Horus-name, prenomen and 
nomen of Tut. ankh* Amen. 

(b) View showing on the back of the box a 
column with lotus capital symbolizing Upper Egypt, 



Plate LVm 

THE LARGE VAULTED-TOP BOX (No. 101) 

It is of painted wood and bears in front the 
cartouches of Tut • ankh* Amen and that of his queen, 
Ankh • es • en - Amen. It contained the king’s linen. 









Plate LIX 


A CHILD’S CHAIR 
(No. 39) 

This small chair, probably the king’s when a 
child, is carved of ebony and inlaid with ivory. It 
has antelope and floral devices of embossed gold on 
the panels of the arms. 



Plate LX 


A CARVED CEDAR-WOOD CHAIR 
(No. 87) 

This magnificent cedar-wood chair has the 
winged solar disk, angle pieces and studs in embossed 
gold. The claws are of ivory, the foot-pieces 
sheathed with gold and bronze. The open-work 
gold-plated ornamentation between the seat and 
rails, tom away by the plunderers, represented the 
44 Union of Upper and Lower Egypt ” in the form of 
lotus and papyrus flowers symbolizing the binding 
together of these two countries. 




Plate LX 



Plate LXI 


THE OPEN-WORK PANEL OF THE BACK OF THE 
CARVED CEDAR-WOOD CHAIR, No. 87 
(See Plate LX) 

The carved open-work device comprises a central 
figure of 44 HEH ” kneeling upon a 44 Nub ’’-sign sym- 
bolizing 44 Golden Eternity.” In each hand are the 
emblems of 44 Myriads of Years,” and on the right 
arm hangs the 64 Ankh,” the symbol of 44 Life.” On 
both sides of the central figure are the Horus-names 
of the king, surmounted by the Horus-hawk 
wearing the crowns of Upper and Lower Egypt, and 
before it the royal cobra. Surmounting the figure 
of “Golden Eternity” is the solar disk flanked by 
the prenomen and nomen of Tut * ankh f Amen. On 
the upper rail the winged solar disk is of embossed 
sheet gold. 


aos 



Plate LXH 


THE KING’S GOLDEN THRONE 
(No. 91) 

(See Plates II, LXIH and LXIV) 

A magnificent chair of wood overlaid with sheet 
gold and richly adorned with polychrome faience, 
glass and stone inlay, of El Amaraa art. Its legs, of 
feline form, are surmounted by lions 9 heads in 
chased gold of beautiful simplicity. The arms are 
formed of crowned and winged serpents supporting 
with their wings the king’s cartouches, and between 
the vertical bars which support the back there are 
six protective URAEI carved in wood, gilt and inlaid, 
with crowns and solar disks. The heads of these 
serpents are of violet faience, the crowns of silver 
and gold, and the disks of wood gilt. Behind, on the 
back panel, is a scene in relief of papyrus rushes and 
water-fowl (see Plate LXIV). On the front panel of 
the back of the throne is a beautiful and unique 
inlaid palace scene of the king and the queen (for 
description see Plate II, and pp. 46 and 117). The 
missing gold open-work device between the rail and 
seat of the throne, wrenched away for the metal by 
the tomb-robbers, consisted of papyrus and lotus 
flowers bound to the central “ sma ’’-sign, and sym- 
bolized the 64 Union of the Two Lands,” i.e. the 
Kingdoms of Upper and Lower Egypt. 







Plate LXIII 


THE KING S GOLDEN THRONE 
(No. 91) 

A magnificent chair of wood overlaid with sheet 
gold and richly adorned with polychrome faience, 
glass and stone inlay, of El Amarna art (see Plates 
II, LXII and LX TV). 



Plate LXIV 


THE KING S GOLDEN THRONE 
(No. 91) 

A magnificent chair of wood overlaid with sheet 
gold and richly adorned with polychrome faience, 
glass and stone inlay, of El Amama art (see Plates 
II, LXII and LXIH). 




Platk LX IV 



Plate LXV 

(a) a large pendant scarab of gold and lapis 

LAZULI BLUE GLASS 

(b) BEZEL OF SCARAB 

depicting the king between the god Atum (left) and 
the sun-god Horus (right), the latter deity giving 
Tut *ankh* Amen the symbol of life. Above the king 
is the solar disk radiating life, and below is a decora- 
tive device symbolical of the “Union of the Two 
Kingdoms," Upper and Lower Egypt. 

(c) A GOLD PENDANT 

in the form of Khep eru • neb • Re, the first cartouche 
of Tut* ankli* Amen. It is inlaid with carnelian and 
coloured glass. 

(d) THE CHASED BACK OF PENDANT (c) 


209 



Plate LXVI 

(a) THE CENTRAL PECTORAL OF tHE CORSLET 

The device represents Tut • ankh • Amen (in the 
centre) being introduced by a god and goddess to 
the Theban deity Amen. 

(b) THE BACK PENDANT OF THE CORSLET OF GOLD 
RICHLY INLAID 

The device includes the winged “Kheper"- 
beetle supporting the solar disk, and has the talons 
and tail of the solar hawk holding symbols of life. 
Pendant to the beetle are two royal cobras wearing 
the White Crown of Upper Egypt and the Red Crown 
of Lower Egypt, and upon them hang the symbols 
of life (see Plate XXXVTII, and pp. 116, 136 and 173). 











Plate LXVII 

(a) SEVEN FINGER-RINGS AND AN ORNAMENTAL 
FINGER-RING BEZEL 

These rings are of solid gold and are richly 
decorated with inlay (see Plate XXX, and p. 138). 

(b) GOLD BUCKLES OF OPEN-WORK SHEET GOLD, 
WITH APPLIED PATTERN IN TINY GRANULES 

One device is a hunting scene; in the other Tut- 
ankh'Amen is seated upon his throne. 

(See p. 114.) 



Plate LXVIII 


THE SMALL GOLDEN SHRINE 

It is of nao8 shape upon a sled. The carved 
woodwork is overlaid with sheet gold upon which 
various scenes are chased. 


(See Plate XXIX and pp. 46, 119-120.) 




I’l.ATK 1AM1I 



Plate LXIX 

TWO CEREMONIAL WALKING-STICKS COVERED WITH 
THIN GOLD FOIL 

The heads, arms and feet of the African prisoners 
are of ebony and are notable for their exquisite 
carving. 


2 13 



Plate LXX 

A CEREMONIAL WALKING-STICK 

similar to those on the preceding Plate (LXIX). On 
this stick are represented the two foes of the king, 
symbolizing the Northern and Southern enemies of 
Egypt. The Asiatic type (a) is of ivory, the African 
type (b) is of ebony. They are unique in Egyptian 
art. 


(See p. 115.) 





Plate LXXI 


A STAFF AND STICK 

(a) This staff is decorated with ornamental barks 
and is inlaid with elytra of iridescent beetles. 

(b) A curved-h andled stick, gilt and elaborately 
decorated with coloured barks. 


(See p. 115.) 



Plate LXXII 


STICKS AND WHIPS WITH ORNAMENTAL HANDLES 
IN GOLD-WORK 

The first stick on the left is of gold. The second, 
a whip, is of ivory and has a long hieroglyphic 
inscription. The ornamentation of the third (centre) 
stick is in granulated gold-work. The other two are 
of wood embellished with gold foil. 



Pi. ati. I XX 11 







Plate LXXIII 
TWO STOOLS 

(a) Red-wood trellis-work stool inlaid with ivory 
and ebony. 

(b) A wooden trellis-work stool painted white. 



Plate LXXIV 
TWO STOOLS 

(a) An ornamental wooden stool painted white. 
The open-work device is symbolical of the 44 Union 
of the Two Kingdoms,” Upper and Lower Egypt. 

(b) An ebony stool richly inlaid with ivory and 
embellished with heavy gold mountings. The seat 
of the stool is devised to represent an animal’s skin, 
and the legs terminate in ducks’ heads. 





Platk I.XXV 


Plate LXXV 

TORCH AND TORCH HOLDERS OF BRONZE AND 
GOLD UPON WOODEN PEDESTALS 

These are absolutely new in type, and one of 
them has stiU its torch of twisted linen in position 
in the oil-cup. Two of them had bowls for floating 
wicks, now missing. Probably these were of gold 
and were stolen by the tomb-thieves. On the left 
lamp a small pottery bowl serves to show what they 
were probably like. 

( See p. 113.) 


219 



Plate LXXVI 

THREE OF THE KING’S BOWS 

This illustration shows only the detail of a section 
of the bows. The upper two double bows are of 
composite type and are decorated with ornamental 
barks. The lower bow is of heavy gold and is 
elaborately decorated with fine gold-work inlaid with 
coloured stones and glass. 


(See p. 113.) 





on 


Plate LXXVII 


THREE OF THE KING’S BOWS 


Details of the ends of the preceding bows shown 
Plate LXXVI. 


221 



Plate LXXVm 

TEXTILES OF APPLIED NEEDLEWORK 

(a) Head ornament in the form of hawks’ wings 
and decorated with gold sequins. 

(b) A portion of robe with applied needlework 
decoration and embellished with gold sequins. 

(See p. 171.) 


222 




Pl.ATI LWVI1I 




-*•00 approach 



SKETCHPLAN OF THE TOMB 


223 









INDEX 


Abd el Aziz Bey Yehia visits the 
tomb, 106 

Abd el Halim Pasha Suleman, 178 
Abd-el-Rasuls, family of, discover 
royal tombs, 69, 70 
Ahmes, King, reburial of, 59 
Akh-en-Aten, 41 
cache of, 74, 95 
death of, 42 

photography in cache of, 12/ 
Alabaster jars in antechamber of 
tomb, 110, 115, 121 
jars, a cache of, 83 
libation vases, 113, 116, 136 
sarcophagus of Seti I, 68, 69 
statuette, an unnamed, 77 
vases, 99, 104, 114 
wishing-cup, a, 110 
Alexander, Prince, inspects tomb, 186 
Allenby, Lady, visits the tomb, 106, 
186 

Allenby, Lord, invited to visit the 
tomb, 106 

witnesses opening of sealed door, 
186 

Amen-em*heb, cemetery thief, 58 
Amen-hetep I, reburial of, 59 
tomb of, 52, 75 
Amen-hetep II, King, 50 
arrest of desecrators of tomb of, 73 
his tomb opened : a discovery, 72 
reburial of royal mummies in tomb 
of, 60, 72 

Amen-hetep III, desecration of his 
tomb, 59 

tomb cleared by author, 79 
Amen -lueses, tomb of, 64 
Anchorites, a colony of, in the Valley, 
62 

Ankh-es-en-pa-Aten, Princess, her letter 
to the King of the Hittites, 47 
intrigues of, 47, 48 
maiden name of, 46 
marries Tut-ankh-Amen, 43 
representations of, on tomb furniture, 
46 

the Boghozkeui tablets and, 47 


Annexe of tomb, confused condition of, 
104, 134, 138 

Antechamber of tomb, a partition 
wall in, 112 

a survey of the, 110 et seq. 
an inner sealed door in, 101, 102 
appearance of, on opening of sealed 
door, 179 

difficulty of clearing, 123 
inspection of, 101 

partial reparation of, after tomb- 
robbery, 139, 140 
plundering of, 134, 135 
preliminary photographs of, 127 
size of, 110 

Ay, King, and the burial of Tut*ankh* 
Amen, 44 

Court Chamberlain, 43 

tomb of, discovered and cleared, 68 


B 

Baksheesh system, advantages of, 
154 

Bandits in the valley, 64, 65 
Bead-work, Egyptian love of, 159 
Beads, re-stringing and re-threading, 
160 

Bed, a wooden, 115 
of ebony and woven cord, 113 
Beds, Egyptian, construction of, 113 
Belgians, Queen of the, inspects tomb 
186 

Belzoni, and his hydraulic wheel, 67 
considers he has exhausted possi- 
bility of further discoveries, 68 
76 

death of, 69 

Egyptian researches of, 67 
exhibits his Egyptian treasures, 69 
his account of experiences in Egypt, 
68 

his excavations in Egypt, 67, 68 
Bethel!, Hon. Richard, witnesses open- 
ing of sealed door, 178 


225 



Index 


Biban-el-Meluke, the gate or court of 
the kings, 63, 64 
Boghozkeui, ruins of, 47 
Boomerangs, electrum, 116 
Bouquets of flowers or leaves, 99 
Bows and arrows, 113, 114, 121 
Box, a painted, 104 
of ebony and painted wood, 114 
of ivory and ebony veneer, 115 
shrine-shaped, with double doors, 119 
with incised ornamentation, 114 
Boxes, oviform, 99 
Breasted, Professor, “ Ancient Records 
of Egypt” of, 58, 59 
deciphers seal impressions, 109 
witnesses opening of sealed door, 178 
British Museum, a Memnion bust in, 
67 

Bruce, and Theban bandits, 65, 66 
researches of, in tomb of Rameses 
III, 66 

Brugsch Bey, Emile, investigations at 
Deir el Bahari, 71, 72 
Buckle of sheet gold, 114 
Burchardt, Belzoni and, 67 
Burghclere, Lady, biographical sketch 
of Lord Carnarvon by, 1 et seq. 
Burton, Harry, of Metropolitan Mu- 
seum, New York, 108, 109, 127, 
130 

work in the Valley, 69 


C 

Cabinets, note-card, 164 
Cairo Museum, a stela in, 45 
exhibits from tomb in, 150 
royal mummies in, 72 
treasures awaiting final restoration 
in, 176 

Calcite wine-strainer, a, 116 
Callender, A. R., his work in the tomb, 
92, 93, 101, 107, 130, 180 
joins Howard Carter, 91 
Candle tests for foul gas, 95 
Canopic chest and jars, 184 
Canopy, a travelling, 120 
Carnarvon, Lady, excavation work in 
the Valley, 85 

Carnarvon, Lord, biographical sketch 
of, 1 et seq. 
death of, 188 

enters the tomb, 101, 182, 186 
his concession in the Valley, 75 
replies to Mr. Carter's cable, 91 
witnesses opening of sealed door, 178 


Casket, a painted wooden, and its 
contents, 110, 111, 166 et seq . 
how it w as treated, 164 et seq. 
removed from tomb, 130 
with decorative panels, 113 
Caskets, painted and inlaid, 99 
Cemetery guardians connive at tomb- 
plundering, 52, 55 
Cemetery thieves, trial of, 58 
Chair, a carved cedar wood, 116 
a miniature, 114 
a rush-work, 115 

of ivory, gold, wood and leather 
work, 104 

with decorative panels of ebony, 
ivory and gold, 114 
Champollion, work in the Valley, 69 
Chariots, 99, 120, 130, 131, 132 
Chest, an underlinen, 116 
of ebony, ivory and red wood, 114 
Cloak, an imitation leopard-skin, 171 
Cloth, treatment of, 167 
Collarettes and necklaces, 114, 116 
Collars of Tell el Amama leaf and 
flower type, 173 
Composite animal couch, 116 
Corslet, a remarkable, 116, 120 
reconstruction of, 173, 174 
Couches, animal-sided, 98, 99, 112 et 
seq., 130, 131 

Cow-headed couch, 112, 115 
Cups, faience, 116 

Cust, Sir Charles, witnesses opening of 
sealed door, 178 


D 

Daoud Pasha, Mudir of Keneh, and a 
thief, 71 

and the Abd-cl-Rasuls, 70 
Davis, Theodore, and burial place of 
Tutankh-Amen, 77 
excavations in the Valley by, 73, 79 
relinquishes his concession, 76 
D^cauville railway, transport by, 176 
Deir el Bahari, mummy of Thothmes I 
removed to, 53 

removal of other kings to, 60, 69 
royal mummies found by the Abd- 
el-Rasuls, 69, 70 
secret passage to, 64 
Descending passage, discovery of a, 9 
” Description of the East,” Pococke'a, 
63 

Devilliers, M., and tomb of Amen 
hetep, 79 


226 




inaex 


Drah Abu’l Negga foot-hills, tomb of 
Amen*hetep I on, 52, 75 
Drovetti quarrels with Belzoni, 68 
Duck-stools, folding, 114 


E 

Egypt and Asia, intermarriages be- 
tween royal houses of, 47 

Egyptian Hall, Piccadilly, Belzoni’ s 
exhibition in, 69 

Egyptian monarchs, their love of 
ostentation, 51, 52 

Egyptian State Railway, courtesy of, 
109 

Egyptians, their conception of burial, 
51 

Egyptologists inspect the tomb, 186 

Ehenefer, cemetery thief, 58 

Electric light installed in tomb, 98, 
101, 127 

Engelbach, Mr., Chief Inspector of 
Department of Antiquities, 93, 
101, 178 

Excavation, importance of photo- 
graphing surveying work in, 150 

Excavator, life of the, 124, 125, 153 
et seq. 


F 

Facade tombs of Middle Kingdom, 
' 63 (note) 

Faience cup, Tut-ankhAmen’s, 77 
rings, a pad of, 140 
vases, 104, 135, 136 
Field-work and its importance, 125, 
152 

" Five Years’ Explorations at Thebes,” 
by Lord Carnarvon and Howard 
Carter, 75 

Fly- whisk, horse-hair, 121 
Food offerings, discovery of, 115 
Funeral bouquets, 110, 124 
Funerary material, a cache of, 78 
Funerary temples, alteration in dis- 
position of, 52, 53 
and their use, 52, 53 


G 

Gaming board, a, 104 
Gardiner, Dr. Alan, 109 
witnesses opening of sealed door- 
way, 178 


Garstin, Sir William, and removal of 
body of Amen-hetep, 72 
enters the tomb, 186 
invites author to excavate for Lord 
Carnarvon, 75 

witnesses opening of sealed door, 178 
Gauntlet, an archer’s, 171 
German expedition to the Valley, 69 
Gesso, method of fixing to wood, 159 
Glass vases, 114 

Gold rings in a fold of cloth, 114, 138 


H 

Hall, Mr., draughtsman to American 
expedition, 108, 109, 130 
Hapi, cemetery thief, 58 
Harness of chariots, 121, 132 
Hat-shep-sflt, Queen, sarcophagus in- 
tended for, 81 
tomb of, 53, 73, 82 
Hauser, Mr., draughtsman to Amer- 
ican expedition, 108, 109, 130 
Hay, work in the Valley, 69 
Head, work in the Valley, 69 
Head-rest, a gilt. 111, 167, 170 
Head-shawls and their use, 138 
Herbert, Hon. Mervyn, witnesses open- 
ing of sealed door, 178 
Herbert, Lady Evelyn, 92, 186 
enters the tomb, 101 
witnesses opening of sealed door, 
178 

Hermits in Valley of the Kings, 62 
Hittites, King of the, and Tutankh* 
Amen’s widow, 47, 48 
Hor-em heb, King, orders “ renewal of 
burial ” of Thothmes IV, 54 
supplants Ay, 44 
tomb of, 74 

Hydraulic wheel introduced into Egypt, 
67 


I 

Ibraham Effendi, an official inspec- 
tion of Antechamber by, 101 
Ineni constructs hidden tomb of 
Thothmes I, 53 

Inhapi, Queen, reburial of Seti I and 
Rameses II in tomb of, 60 
Intermarriages between royal houses 
of Egypt and Asia, 47 
Iramen, cemetery thief, 58 


227 




Index 


j 

Jars, alabaster, 83, 110, 115, 121 
pottery, 77 


K 

Karnak temples, restorations of, 45 
Kemwese, cemetery thief, 58 
Khamwese, vizier of Thebes, 56, 58 
King's mannequin, a, 120 
Kurna, tomb-robbers of, 70 
Kurna hills, a midnight climb of, 80 
bandits of, 64 


L 

Laboratory work, why necessary, 
151 et seq. 

Lacau, M., Director-General of Service 
of Antiquities, 178, 182, 186 
inspects the tomb, 106 

Leopard-skin priestly robe, 113 

Lepsius survevs Valley of the Kings, 
69 

Libation vase of alabaster, 113 
vases of blue faience, 116, 136 

Limestone, 162 

Lion-headed couch, 112, 113 

Lisht, pyramid field, American ex- 
cavations on, 108 

Loret, M., opens up royal tombs, 72, 
84 

Lotiform cup of translucent alabaster, 

99 

Lucas, Mr., Director of Chemical 
Department of Egyptian Govern- 
ment, 108, 109, 130 

Luxor, tomb of Tut-ankh-Amen dis- 
covered at, 90 

Lythgoe, Mr., Curator of Egyptian 
Department, Metropolitan Mu- 
seum, New York, 107, 178 


M 

Makt-Aten, Princess, death of, 43 
Mannequin, a, and its use, 120 
Maspero, Sir Gaston (Director of An- 
tiquities Department), 75, 76 
advises against further investiga- 
tions in the Valley, 76 
Medinet Habu, Temple of, 76 
Menpehti-Re, King ( see Rameses I) 


Mentu*her*khepesh*ef, tomb of, 68 
Mer-en*Ptah, tomb of, 64, 69 
Mert-Aten, Princess, marriage of, 42 
Merton, Mr., Times correspondent, and 
the official opening of tomb, 106, 
141 

Meryt-Re-Hat*shep-sfit, Queen, 84 
Metropolitan Museum of Art, New 
York, co-operation of, 108 
Jars from the Valley in, 77 
Mohammed Ali, Belzoni and, 67 
Mohamed Bey Fahmy visits the 
tomb, 106 

Monuments, magnificence of, 51 
Mourning for the dead, Egyptian 
manner of, 72 

Mummies, costly outfit of, 51, 54 
Mystery, Egyptian love of, 154 


N 

Napoleon, his Commission d’ftgypte, 
66, 79 

Necklace, a double, of faience beads, 
171 

an elaborate, 120 

Necropolis seal, the royal, 78, 89, 90, 
92 

Needlework, applied, examples of, 
discovered, 172 

Nefertiti, wife of Akh-en-Atcn, 43 

New York expedition, generous help 
from, 108 

Newspaper correspondents visit the 
Valley, 142 

Norden's description of Theban bandits, 
65 

Note-cards of objects found in tomb, 
164 


O 

Osman Bey essays to curb activities 
of Theban bandits, 65 
Osorkon 1, 61 
Ostraca, discovery of, 83 


Packing, question of, 176 
Papyrus, treatment of, 161 
" Papyrus sandals of His Majesty," 
171 


223 



Index 


Paraffin wax, melted, advantages of, 
166 

Paynezem, High Priest of Amen, 59 
Pectoral of corslet, 136 
Pendants, a collar of, 140 
Perfume Jars in carved alabaster, 115 
Peser, Mayor of Thebes, 56-58 
Pewero, guardian of necropolis at 
Thebes, 56, 57 

Philetairos, son of Ammonios, inscribes 
his name in a tomb, 61 
Photography, a dark room in a tomb, 
127 

indoor, 157 

value of, in excavation work, 155 
Pit-tomb, contents of a, 77 
Pococke, Richard, “ A Description of 
the East ” by, 63 et seq. 

Pottery Jars, a cache of, 77 
Preservatives for objects taken from 
tomb, 109, 124, 126, 130, 148, 152, 
153 

Press representatives visit the tomb, 
109 

Priestesses buried in Valley of the 
Kings, 61 

Pyramids, the entrance passage, and 
how concealed, 51 


R 

Rameses I, tomb of, discovered by 
Belzoni, 68 

Rameses II, “ colossal Memnion bust ” 
of, 67 

desecration of his tomb, 59 
reburial of, 59, 60 
tomb of, cleared by Lepsius, 68 
Rameses III, tomb of, 59, 64, 66 
Rameses IV, papyrus, 187 
tomb of, 64, 83 
Rameses VI, tomb of, 64, 85, 87 
Rameses IX, tomb-robbery in reign of, 
55 

Rameses XI, tomb of, 64 
Rameses XII, tomb of, 64 
Rawlinson, researches of, 69 
Rhind, explores Valley of Kings, 69 
Rings, gold, in a fold of cloth, 114, 138 
Robes, royal, in painted casket (No. 
21), 111, 167 

ornamentation of. 111, 168 
Rock-hewn passages, classical refer- 
ences to, 61 

Rosellini, researches of, 69 
Royal monuments, unavailing efforts 
for safeguarding, 51 


Royal necropolis seal, the, 78, 89, 90, 
92 

Royal tombs, desecration of ( see 
Tomb-robbery) 


S 

Salt, Mr., British Consul-General in 
Egypt, Belzoni and, 67, 69 
explores the Valley, 69 
Sandals, bead, 121, 123 
Court, 111 

leather, gold-decorated, 170 
preservative treatment of, 123, 124 
rush and papyrus, 167, 170 
Sarcophagus, an alabaster, discovered 
by Belzoni, 68 
exhibited in London, 69 
of crystalline sandstone, 81 
Scarab of gold and lapis-lazuli, 114 
of Thothmes III, 93 
Sceptre, a golden, 114 
Seal, Tut-ankh-Amen’s, 90, 92, 103 
Sealed doorway, a second, 95 

passage debris removed from, 92, 93, 
95 

seal impressions on, 95 
Sealed doorway discovered, 88 
investigations of, 92 et seq. 
secured against interference, 90 
Sealed doorway to sepulchral chamber, 
opening of the, 178 et seq. 
sentinel figures guarding, 99, 101, 
112, 184 

Sealings, clay, 78 
noted and photographed, 93 
Sen-nefer, appropriates a royal tomb, 
84 

Sentinel statues, 99, 101, 112, 184 
Sepulchral monuments, an unusual 
entry on walls of Tut*ankh*Amen's 
tomb, 44 
Set-nekht, 64 

Seti I, Belzoni's discovery in tomb of, 
68 

his tomb desecrated : and reburial 
of, 59, 60 

Seti II, laboratory work in tomb of, 
129, 162 
tomb of, 60, 64 

Shawabti statuette of Tut *ankh -Amen, 
120 

Shrine within the sepulchre, the, 180 
et seq. 

Shrines, black, 99 
emblematic, 114 


229 




Index 


Si-Ptah, tomb of, 74 
Sickle flints, 152 

Sistra (musical instruments), 115 
Smenkhka-Re, King, husband of 
Mert-Aten, 42 

Soane Museum, the, sarcophagus from 
tomb of Seti I in, 68 
Staircase in the rock discovered, 87, 
92 

Statues in Tutankh-Amen’s tomb, 99, 
101, 112, 184 
Staves, 99, 113 

Steel gate for door of chamber, 106, 
107, 109, 129 

Stela of Tut-ankhAmen usurped by 
Hor em heb, 45 (note) 

Sticks, 115, 121 

Stone, laboratory treatment of, 161 
Stool, a plain wood, painted white, 
119 

a rush-work, 116 
an ornamental white, 115 
of ebony and red wood, 115 
of ebony, ivory and gold, 119 
Surveying* in excavation work, im- 
portance of, 150 


T 

Tapestry weaving, examples of, 172 
Ta usert, 64 

Tell el Amarna, Art of, 118, 120 
death of Akh-en-Aten at, 42 
removal of Court from, 45 
Temperature, effect of, on objects from 
the tomb, 165 

Temple restorations at Thebes, 45 
Textiles, variable condition of, 159 
Theban bandits, 64 et seq. ( cf . Tomb- 
robbery) 

Thebes, Court removed to, 45 
prefatory work at, 82 et seq. 
rainstorms of, 133 

Thothmes I, tomb of, 50, 52, 53, 61, 72 
Thothmes II, reburial of, 59 
Thothmes III, 41 
a scarab of, 93 

an interesting archaeological fact 
concerning, 84 
gold statuette of, 137 
tomb of, 72, 84 

Thothmes IV, designs tomb of Amen- 
hetep III, 79 

examples of tapestry weaving in 
tomb of, 172 
tomb of, 54, 73 


Throne, a golden inlaid, 99 
a remarkable, and its historical im- 
portance, 117 et seq. 
representations of Tut-ankh-Amen's 
wife on back of, 46 
Thua, tomb of, 74 
Times , the, reports official opening of 
tomb, 106 

selected for publication of informa- 
tion, 143 

Toilet table, a, 115 
Tomb design, a new theory of, 51 
Tomb-robbery, 52, 54, 55 et seq., 70, 72, 
73, 79, 80, 102, 104 
evidence of, 54, 133 et seq. 
precautions against, 51 
robbers surprised at work, 80 
temptations of, 55 
trial of robbers, 58 
Tomb-work, importance of immediate 
notes on, 162 

Tombs, Valley, Pococke’s description 
and plans of, 64 

Torch-holders, bronze and gold, 113 
Tottenham, Mr., oflicial inspection of 
tomb by, 106 

Transport of tomb treasures, how 
accomplished, 176 et seq. 

“ Travels in Egypt and Nubia," 
Norden's, 65 

“ Travels to Discover the Source of 
the Nile," Bruce’s, 65, 66 
Turin papyrus, the, 161 
Tut ankh Amen, burial ceremonies of, 
44 

changes his religion, 45 
interesting evidence as to age of, 171, 
172 

marriage of, 41, 43 

oflicial opening of his tomb, 106 

parentage of, 41 

paucity of information regarding, 45, 
46 

probable site of tomb, 82 
religion of, 45, 118, 119 
restores temples at Thebes, 45 
tomb of, 52, 54, 60, 87 et seq., 92, 93 
Tyi, Queen, 43, 95 

sepulchral shrine of, 74, 79 
Tyi, wife of Ay, 43 


U 

Underlinen, a chest of, 110 
Usermarc-Sctepnere, King (see Rameses 

H) 


230 



Index 


v 

Valley of the Tombs of the Kings, 
the, 50 

American excavators in, 73 
anchorites in possession of, 62 
bandits in, 64 et seq. 

Belzoni's excavations in, 68 
commencement of campaign in, 82 
concession granted to Lord Carnar- 
von and Mr. Carter, 76 
finding of Tut-ankh* Amen's tomb, 
in, 87 et seq. 

first tomb constructed in, 50, 61 
German expedition to, 69 
how guarded, after discovery of 
tomb, 126 

Pococke's description of approach 
to, 63 el seq. 

rock-hewn passages of, 61 
starting point of operations in, 82 
et seq. 

Vandalism, a charge of, disproved, 73 

Vases, alabaster, 99, 104, 114 
faience, 104, 135, 136 
glass, 114 

libation, 113, 116, 136 


Visitors, an influx of, and reflections 
. thereon, 143 et seq. 


W 

Walls of tombs, a reprehensible prac- 
tice, 61 

Water skins, discovery of, 94 
Wax, paraflin, as preservative, 166 
Whip, an ivory, 115 
Wilkinson numbers the tombs in the 
Valley, 69 

Wine-strainer, a calcite, 116 
Winlock, Mr., director of New York 
excavations, 77, 108, 178 
Wishing-cup. an alabaster, 110 
Wood, preservation of, 158 
Wooden cases containing food offerings, 
115 

Woodwork, problems of, 158 et seq. 


Y 

Yua, tomb of, 74 


231 



Printed bt 

Cassell & Company, Limited, La Belli Sauvage, 
London, E C. 4. 

5.1026